JP7723342B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

One example of a gaming machine that spins and then stops multiple reels is a slot machine. In a slot machine, multiple symbols are displayed around the outer periphery of each reel, and some of the symbols on each reel are visible through a display window. When a player inserts a medal, a winning line is set. After that, the player operates the start lever, and a lottery is held inside the slot machine to determine whether a winning combination, such as a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB"), a small bonus, or a replay, begins to spin. After each reel has started spinning, the player operates the stop switch, which stops each reel sequentially, completing one game. When all reels have stopped spinning, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination stops on a winning line, a prize is awarded, and the player is awarded a prize, such as a medal payout or a change in game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In recent years, in addition to the BB state, which is entered when a BB win is achieved, some machines have also been equipped with an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player and notifies the player of the order in which to operate the stop switch to achieve a specified win when a specified combination is won.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-355364

There is a demand for gaming machines such as those exemplified above to further increase gaming enjoyment.

The above problem is not limited to slot machines such as those exemplified above, but also applies to other gaming machines that cyclically display multiple types of images and then end the cyclical display based on the operation of a stop operation means.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase gaming enjoyment.

The invention of claim 1 relates to a gaming machine including a plurality of cyclic display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures, a start operation means operated to start the cyclic display of the pictures, a lottery means for drawing a winning combination, a plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pictures, and a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player when a winning combination obtained by the lottery for the winning combination and a winning pattern corresponding to the winning combination are stopped at an effective position to form a predetermined combination, the gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for achieving a specific win is activated more frequently than in the first gaming state, and the gaming machine further includes an award determination means for determining whether or not to award an increased bonus which increases the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, an increased bonus awarding means for awarding the increased bonus when the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, an effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the increased bonus should be awarded, and an execution means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. a period setting means for setting a number of play times as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be performed when it is determined that the suggestive performance should be performed; a comparison means for comparing the number of play times set by the period setting means with the remaining number of play times available in the second game state when the execution determination means determines that the suggestive performance should be performed; and a change means for changing the remaining number of play times available in the second game state so that the remaining number of play times available in the second game state becomes the number of play times set by the period setting means when the number of play times set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of play times available in the second game state.The system is characterized in that the second game state does not end until the performance period ends, so that even if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should not be awarded, the number of play times available in the second game state may increase, while the length of the performance period set by the period setting means does not change .

This will make it possible to increase interest in gaming.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front door open. Rear view of the front door. Front view of the housing. A diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. Block diagram of a slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for three-coin play. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for two-coin play. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a rotation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 1. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a migration preparation process. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game areas. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a slide table used in simulated gaming. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a slide table used in simulated gaming. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of rotation and display modes in a simulated game. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance execution process in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process in the display control device. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo game flag storage area in the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the configuration of a header. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 1. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process 3. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment, showing a state in which the front door is closed. FIG. 2 is a block diagram relating to a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an instruction monitor display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation end command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a menu process. 10 is a flowchart showing a standby process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command waiting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a press performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing a result display process. 13 is a flowchart showing game section processing in a chance mode in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing of an all reel stop completion command in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing a start command process in a chance mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of display modes displayed on an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a normal section. 10 is a flowchart showing game zone processing in a normal zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning roles and navigation rates. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning combination information creation process. 10 is a flowchart showing an operation navigation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a chance mode in the seventh embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition command process in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition presentation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a section lottery process in a notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a first effect determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second effect determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a competition command process in the notification mode. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the notification mode.

(First embodiment)

Below, an embodiment of the invention as applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is one type of gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 480 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 480 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are eight types of symbols: "cherry" (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "watermelon" (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "bell" (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "red 7" (e.g., the 16th symbol on the left reel 32L), "replay" (e.g., the 15th symbol on the left reel 32L), "star" (e.g., the 14th symbol on the left reel 32L), "bar" (e.g., the 11th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "white 7" (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel lines running horizontally and two diagonally, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 7(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as an active line. The four combined lines of the upper line L1, lower line L3, downward-right line L4, and upward-right line L5 are never set as active lines.

Figure 8 shows the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include BB1 win and BB2 win.

When the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a BB1 win is achieved. When the "red 7" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB2 win is achieved. When one of these BB wins is achieved, the game state transitions to BB state.

A replay win is a prize that grants you the privilege of playing the next game without inserting a medal.

If the "Replay" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a replay win will be awarded.

Small winning combinations that result in medal payouts include watermelon winning, cherry winning, bell winning, and supplementary winning.

When the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a watermelon win will be awarded and three medals will be paid out. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on an active line, a cherry win will be awarded and three medals will be paid out.

When the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the combination lines, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. More specifically, in addition to when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell win when a symbol combination that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 stops on the middle line L2. Symbol combinations that appear to result in a bell win include, for example, a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "star" symbol, and a "star" symbol, or a combination of a "bar" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, and a "bar" symbol. Details of winning symbol combinations are omitted, but one medal is paid out when a complementary win is achieved.

In the following, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning prize will also be referred to as winning symbol combinations. For example, a BB2 symbol combination is a symbol combination that results in a BB2 prize, i.e., a combination of a "red 7", a "red 7", and a "white 7". Furthermore, the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to each winning prize will also be referred to as winning symbols. For example, a BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, or 26R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning; when the center stop switch 43 is operated, the center reel 32M stops spinning; and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at a time. Also, to the left of first credit insertion switch 56 are second credit insertion switch 57 and third credit insertion switch 58. Second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, while third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal. Together with medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56-58 constitute input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, credit insertion switches 56-58 merely involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display unit 61, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the payout number display unit 62, there is a zone indicator 66 that indicates the game zone. These display units 60-62 and the zone indicator 66 are made up of 7-segment displays, but they can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control unit 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, the hall manager and others can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 9.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, credit insertion detection sensors 56a-58a that individually detect operation of each credit insertion switch 56-58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the section display 66, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65, and is equipped with a board that integrates the CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these devices. After receiving signals from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. Note that the display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60-62.

The CPU 102 described above contains a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and, although not shown, various processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory that serves as storage means, and the programs for executing the various processes shown in the flowcharts of Figures 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 described above as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a status information storage area 106c for storing the game status, and a section information storage area 106d for storing the game section.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 10) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and normal processing performed in the main processing, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 10 to 36.

Figure 10 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

During power outage processing, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in the input/output port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are set to the off state. A RAM judgment value is then calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and this is saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further access to the RAM. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for the possibility that the power supply will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and the system allows writing to RAM 106, resets the power outage flag, and returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the system enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even within the infinite loop, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output. If the power outage signal is no longer being output, the system transitions to main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed, which drives the stepping motors that drive each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate, and brakes the corresponding stepping motor to stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors (see Figure 9), such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a, connected to the input/output port 104, and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, and payout number display unit 62. In step S111, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S112, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S113, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S114, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes ends.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 11.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether a replay win was achieved in the previous game. If a replay win was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Note that the automatic insertion process inserts virtual medals without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if a replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If a replay win was not achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the player of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor read result is normal, it determines whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if it has been operated, it performs a medal return process in which the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it determines whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, it performs a medal insertion process to change the number of bets, etc., and ends the start waiting process. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, it ends the start waiting process.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205 it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified numbers are set to "2" and "3". If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards are carried out. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined in step S206 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards are carried out.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured to allow play to begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S207, an active line setting process is performed to set the middle line L1 as the active line, and in step S208, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Subsequently, the system sequentially executes the lottery process in step S209, the rotation initialization process in step S210, the 4.1 second wait process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the play section process in step S214, and the BB state process in step S215, before returning to step S203.

Next, the lottery processing in step S209 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. This slot machine 10 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it ON, as well as performing a specified operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting is "Setting 1," the lottery table with the lowest expected value for medal payout is selected; when the setting is "Setting 6," the lottery table with the highest expected value for medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 13 is the lottery table selected for three-coin play in "Setting 3," and Figure 14 is the lottery table selected for two-coin play in "Setting 3." Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the index value IV. When determining whether the role is a win or loss, a determination is made as to whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, where a win flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106. For example, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 5, in step S306, a middle, right, left bell win flag indicating a win for the bell, compensation role 2, or compensation role 4 is set in the win flag storage area 106a.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 has been won or the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 has been won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set is completed (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning is achieved. In other words, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid across multiple games. Note that in step S306 when the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than BB1 or BB2 has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 has been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if BB2 is won in a two-coin game, and a three-coin game is played while the BB2 winning flag is carried over, BB1 is not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 13 to determine whether a winning combination is achieved in a three-coin game, the probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is approximately 1 in 9.0 each, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is approximately 1 in 50 each, and the probability of winning BB1 is approximately 1 in 12. In a three-coin game, winning a one-coin combination and winning BB2 do not occur.

When using the lottery table shown in Figure 14 to determine whether a winning combination is a success or failure in two-coin play, the probability of winning a replay is approximately 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is approximately 1 in 16,000 each, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is approximately 1 in 50 each, the probability of winning a one-coin combination is approximately 1 in 1.9, and the probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1 in 4.0. In two-coin play, there are no winning combinations in BB1.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no more targets to be determined, this means that the winning/losing judgment of the role has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where the section lottery process related to the transition of the playing section is performed. In step S310, a lottery result command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps the various results obtained in this lottery process, specifically the results of the winning/losing judgment of the role and the lottery results in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command has been sent, the lottery process ends.

When the lottery process is completed, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, rotation initialization processing is performed in step S210. RAM 106 has a motor control storage area that stores information used to control the drive of the stepping motor, and the rotation initialization processing involves initializing this motor control storage area. In step S211, a 4.1-second wait processing is performed. In the 4.1-second wait processing, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (approximately 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reels began spinning in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, the processing waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the 4.1-second wait processing ends. Because of this 4.1-second wait processing, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41.

Next, the reel control process of step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 15. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game in which a bonus such as a medal payout is awarded when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role is stopped during one play (hereinafter also referred to as the "main game"), a pseudo game may also be played. Below, for ease of understanding, we will first explain the reel control process when no pseudo game is played, i.e., when only the main game is played.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo game determination process is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo game will be performed. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, the repetition counter stored in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-play flag indicating that a pseudo-play has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-play flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo-play has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S607, where the reels begin accelerating according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. In other words, the process in step S607 only obtains the spin start setting table address according to the value of the repetition counter, but does not control the drive of the stepping motor. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above, based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, and if the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where it is determined whether the post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has not been set, the process ends.

As described above, during the spin start process, acceleration begins in the order of the left reel 32L → center reel 32M → right reel 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game has been set. If the stop information has not been set, the process proceeds to step S404, where stop information setting processing is performed to set the stop information. In the stop information setting processing, stop information is created based on the result of the winning/losing combination determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Note that in step S404, only stop information for reel stop control in this game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is set; even if a pseudo game is being played, stop information for reel stop control in the pseudo game (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo game stop information") is not set. In step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo game rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started spinning in a pseudo game. In step S702, it is determined whether a pseudo game flag indicating that a pseudo game will be played is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo game will not be played, the pseudo game rotation start command is cleared in step S703, and a rotation start command is set in step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started spinning in a real game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. Thereafter, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, proceed to step S407, where it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished. If the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at the specified rotation speed, proceed to step S408, where instruction monitor display process is performed. In the following step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902, where a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop enable command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started rotating at a constant speed in this game. Also, in step S902, lamps (not shown) on each stop switch 42-44 are lit to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command in this game. Then, command transmission process 2 ends.

When command transmission process 2 is complete, proceed to step S410 and perform stop control processing.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1008, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step S1009, where a stop position determination process is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1106, where a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command and which reel will stop. In addition, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch that issued the stop command is turned off to notify the player that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S1107, a value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S1108, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether the pseudo-game flag is set, and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, the stop information change process is performed in step S1110, and then the stop position determination process is terminated.

Here, the stop information change process refers to a process that changes the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the stop information change process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, when a win occurs on any of the left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, or right-left-center bell (see Figure 13), the stop information change process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that generated the stop command.

For example, if the left-center-right bell is won, the stop information is changed so that a bell win occurs if the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, and a compensatory role 1 or compensatory role 4 win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different order. The same applies to the left-center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell. The stop information is changed so that a bell win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order corresponding to the name of the winning role, and a compensatory role win occurs if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different order. Note that below, the left-center-right bell, left-right center bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells."

Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, if a replay is won through the stop information setting process and stop information change process, a replay win is achieved regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. If the push order bell is won, a bell win is achieved regardless of the operation timing if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the correct operation sequence, and a supplementary role win is achieved regardless of the operation timing if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the incorrect operation sequence. If a 1-coin role is won, a supplementary role win is achieved regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. If a watermelon, cherry, BB1, or BB2 is won, the corresponding win is achieved by operating the stop switches 42-44 in aim for the winning symbol, i.e., at the specified timing.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S1008 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reel is not stopped during the stop control process (normal process), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, brake processing is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S1011 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012, where an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S1014, where it is determined whether the instruction monitor (described below) is currently being displayed. If the instruction monitor is currently being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not currently being displayed, the process waits for 100 msec in step S1016 and then terminates. Incidentally, the 100 msec wait in step S1016 is to wait for the brake process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, proceed to step S411 and determine whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, this process is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

The medal payout process begins with a payout determination process. This process sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is aligned on a pay line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on a pay line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a determination is made as to whether a winning combination has been achieved on the pay line. If a winning combination has not been achieved, the payout determination process is terminated. If a winning combination has been achieved, the process further determines whether the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the payout amount corresponding to that condition device are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106, and the payout determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and abnormality processing is performed, which notifies the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state will remain until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is sent to the display control device 81 to inform it of the condition device that won in this game.

When a winning result command is sent, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that a small win was not achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. If a replay win has not been achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if a replay win has been achieved, the replay setting process is performed and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process S204 described above, if it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count value, and the added value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. Furthermore, if the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit while the payout number is being added, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also changes the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout.

Next, we will explain the game section processing in step S214 later, and then the BB state processing in step S215.

The BB state processing determines whether the current game state is BB state. If it is not BB state, it determines whether the BB1 hit flag or BB2 hit flag is set. If neither BB hit flag is set, a state command is sent to the display control device 81 and the BB state processing ends. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (i.e., the game state of the next game), and a state command corresponding to the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is sent.

If any BB win flag is set, it is determined whether the corresponding BB win has occurred based on the condition device set in the previous payout determination process. If the corresponding BB win has not occurred, a status command is sent and the BB status process is terminated. If the corresponding BB win has occurred, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if a BB1 win has occurred, a BB1 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and the remaining BB game number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c is set to 30. If a BB2 win has occurred, a BB2 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and the remaining BB game number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c is set to 30. A status command is then sent and the BB status process is terminated.

If the current game state is BB state, the remaining BB game counter is decremented by 1, and a determination is made as to whether the remaining BB game counter has reached 0. If the remaining BB game counter has not reached 0, a state command is sent and the BB state processing is terminated. If the remaining BB game counter has reached 0, this means that the BB state termination condition has been met, so the BB setting flag is cleared. A state command is then sent, and the BB state processing is terminated.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the game state remains in the BB state until 30 plays have been played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only three-coin play is possible, and a one-coin win is always achieved, resulting in a compensation win in which one medal is paid out. Therefore, when a game transitions to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player will have lost 60 (= (3 - 1) x 30) medals by the time the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only two-coin play is possible, and a one-coin win is always achieved, resulting in a compensation win in which one medal is paid out. Therefore, when a game transitions to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player will have lost 30 (= (2 - 1) x 30) medals by the time the BB state ends.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages two game states: the normal state and the BB state, and also manages two game zones: the normal zone and the advantageous zone.

Figure 24 shows the transition of game zones.

The normal zone is a game zone where a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous zone. In the normal zone, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced. Therefore, in the normal zone, if two coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game, and if three coins are played, a decrease of approximately 0.91 medals is expected for each game. If the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is won, the game zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

The advantageous zone is a play zone in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 can be announced if the player wins the push order bell. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone in that the operation order can be announced. The advantageous zone is composed of two play modes: chance mode and notification mode. If the player wins the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone in the normal zone, the player will transition to the advantageous zone's chance mode. The advantageous zone ends when 1,500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, regardless of the play mode at that time. When the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400, more specifically, when the increase in the number of medals owned by the player in the advantageous zone reaches 2,400 without reaching 0. In other words, when the difference in the number of coins from the base point at which the player's medals in the advantageous zone have decreased the most reaches 2,400.

Chance mode is a game mode in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to notification mode. Chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won, or when a predetermined number of plays have been played in chance mode. When chance mode ends, the game transitions to notification mode. In chance mode, as in the normal section, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced if the push order bell is won. Therefore, in chance mode, if two coins are played, approximately 0.95 medals can be expected to be lost per game, and if three coins are played, approximately 0.91 medals can be expected to be lost per game.

In notification mode, when playing with three coins, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is selected is announced. Therefore, in notification mode, when playing with two coins, a decrease of approximately 0.95 medals can be expected per game, while when playing with three coins, an increase of approximately 3.5 medals can be expected per game. Notification mode ends when the net increase in medals in this notification mode reaches a predetermined number. When notification mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends and the player transitions to the normal zone.

As described above, this slot machine 10 allows players to increase the number of medals they own by playing with three medals in notification mode.

The following explains the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing game zones, with reference to the flowcharts in Figure 25 and subsequent figures. To facilitate understanding, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained separately.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether a win flag is set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any winning combination has been achieved. If a win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1303, where it is determined whether the win flag was set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a BB2 win does not occur in a three-coin game. Therefore, if the only win flag that is set is the BB2 win flag, it is determined that the win flag was not set in the current game. If a win flag other than the BB2 win flag is set, it is determined that the win flag was set in the current game. If the win flag was set in the current game, the transition flag is set in step S1304, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S1305, and this process ends. If the current game involves two coins, if the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag is set but not for the current game, the process will end.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In such a case, the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. In step S1403, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S1404, the zone game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, the transition game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700. In step S1407, the mode game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S1408, the difference number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, an interval command is sent in step S1409, and this processing ends. Here, an interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time the game ends (i.e., the play interval and play mode of the next game, and if it is an advantageous interval, the number of plays played in that advantageous interval and the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.), and in step S1409, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

As described above, if you win any role during three-coin play in the normal zone, you will move to the chance mode in the advantageous zone. As shown in Figure 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3," if the BB1 win flag and the BB2 win flag are not carried over, there is only a 1 in 13 chance of a miss, and if the BB1 win flag or the BB2 win flag is carried over, there is only a 1 in 6.4 chance of a miss. Therefore, if you play three coins in the normal zone, the game will end in a few games. Note that if you play two coins, you will not move to the advantageous zone, regardless of the result of the role.

Next, we will explain the processing in chance mode during advantageous zones.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1502, where it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare roles, so in step S1502, it is determined whether the watermelon win flag or the cherry win flag is set. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S1503, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S1504, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S1505 and the process is terminated. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process is terminated without setting the transition flag. If the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, the process will end without conducting the transition lottery.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1601, the termination determination process is performed.

In the termination determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 29, in step S1701, 1 is added to the value of the interval game number counter, and in step S1702, it is determined whether the value of the interval game number counter has reached 1500. If the value of the interval game number counter has not reached 1500, the process proceeds to step S1706, where it is determined whether a replay win has been achieved. If a replay win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1707, where a difference number adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference coin adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of this subtraction is added to the difference coin counter. It is then determined whether the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater. If the value of the difference coin counter is less than 0, the value of the difference coin counter is changed to 0 and the difference coin adjustment process is terminated; if the value of the difference coin counter is 0 or greater, the difference coin adjustment process is terminated as is. The reason the difference coin adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is achieved is that the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so there is no need to perform the difference coin adjustment process.

If it is determined in step S1706 that a replay win has been achieved, or if the difference in number of coins adjustment process has been performed in step S1707, it is determined in step S1708 whether the value of the difference in number of coins counter is greater than 2400. If the value of the difference in number of coins counter is 2400 or less, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the value of the interval game number counter is 1500, or if it is determined in step S1708 that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400, the advantageous interval end process shown in steps S1703 to S1705 is performed, and this process ends. In the advantageous interval end process, the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S1703, and the interval display 66 is turned OFF in step S1704. In step S1705, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous interval. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the game zone processing, in step S1602, it is determined whether the current game zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current game zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S1601, and after sending a zone command in step S1610, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S1603 and determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S1604, add 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S1605, determine whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so in step S1606, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S1608, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag. In step S1609, the net increase number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 120. Then, in step S1610, an zone command is sent, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1607, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S1610, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an announcement flag in step S1608, and the net increase number counter is set to 120 in step S1609. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S1610, and the process ends.

If step S1603 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S1610 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, even if the transition lottery is not won, chance mode transitions to notification mode if three coins are played corresponding to the value of the transition game counter. The value set in the transition game counter when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the interval game counter reaches 1500 during the game zone end determination process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) does not occur if three coins are played. Furthermore, because the expected medal gain or loss in chance mode is -0.91 coins (playing three coins) or -0.95 coins (playing two coins), the event in which the value of the difference coin counter exceeds 2400 during the game zone end determination process (step S1708, see FIG. 21) does not occur. In other words, with this slot machine 10, when three coins are played, the advantageous zone ends in chance mode and the game transitions to the normal zone does not occur.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S1802, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S1803, where an add-on lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the add-on lottery, the win/loss determination is based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the add-on lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that an add-on number of 30, 50, 100, or 300 will be won, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that an add-on number of 10, 20, 30, or 50 will be won. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery has been won, the add-on flag is set in step S1805, and an add-on command is sent in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on coins to be added to the value of the net increase coin counter. In step S1807, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the net increase coin counter. This process then ends. If the add-on lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the add-on flag. If the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without conducting the add-on lottery.

Here, we will explain the unique processing that is performed in the notification mode during reel control processing.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15, in step S401, pseudo-game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo-game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, in step S501, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process ends. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the add-on flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, i.e., if the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, and the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and the process ends. If the add-on flag is not set, i.e., if the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is held in step S505 to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In the pseudo-game lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role has been won. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery is not won, the process ends. If the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504 and this process ends.

As described above, in notification mode, if the player wins the additional lottery or the pseudo game lottery, the pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played for that game round.

Figure 31 shows an example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a pseudo game is being played.

In the notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man character strolling down a road, and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65. In Figure 31(a), a bell win was achieved in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. In the case of a pseudo game, when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, as shown in Figure 31(b), a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. When the "red 7" symbols on each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stop on center line L2, as shown in FIG. 31(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a notification that the current game is a pseudo game, and also displays that an additional 100 coins will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 ends the notification that the game is pseudo, and displays an image of a young man character strolling down the road and a message that the number of coins remaining to be paid out until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184, thereby notifying the player that the pseudo game has been switched to the main game.

Figure 32 shows another example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when a simulated game is being played.

In Figure 32(a), a bell win occurred in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 indicates that 84 coins remain until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is being played, as shown in Figure 32(b), when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, a notification urging the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 in order to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R does not pseudo-stop on the center line L2, as shown in Figure 32(c), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player that the current game is a pseudo game and that no bonus will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in Figure 32(d), spinning begins with the left reel 32L. At this time, if the push order bell is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 will end the notification that the pseudo game is in progress and will display the operation sequence that will result in a bell win and that the number of coins remaining to be paid out until the end of the notification mode remains at 84, thereby notifying the player that the pseudo game has been switched to the main game. If the center left and right bells are won, the operation sequence of "213" will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 32 (d).

As described above, when a simulated game is played on this slot machine 10, the game progresses in the following order in one play: simulated game → main game. Therefore, the following explanation will begin with the reel control process in the simulated game.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 15, in step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, a determination is made as to whether a post-pseudo-game flag, indicating that a pseudo-game has been played, is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if a pseudo-game has not been played, the process proceeds to step S607, where acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, a determination is made as to whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where a determination is made as to whether a post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has not been set, the process terminates.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game has been set. Since the stop information has not been set in the first step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where a stop information setting process is performed to set the stop information. In other words, in this slot machine 10, after performing the rotation start process for the pseudo game, i.e., while the pseudo game is being executed, the stop information for this game is set. Thereafter, in step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission process 1 is performed.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S705, where a pseudo-game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. This process then ends. Upon receiving the pseudo-game rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effects for pseudo-games shown in Figure 31 (b) and other figures.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, where it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished. If the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at the specified rotation speed, the process proceeds to step S408, where instruction monitor display processing is performed.

Here, the instruction monitor is a display unit that notifies the user of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44 to achieve a bell win, and is managed by the main control unit 101. In this slot machine 10, the payout coin number display unit 62 functions as an instruction monitor, and when a left, center, or right bell win is achieved, i.e., when a bell win can be achieved by operating the left stop switch 42, center stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44 in that order, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "1." When a center, right, or left bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "2." When a right, left, or center bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "3." When a left, right, or center bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "4." When a center, left, or right bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "5." When a right, center, or left bell win is achieved, the payout coin number display unit 62 displays "6."

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 19, in step S801 it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether the pseudo game flag has been set. If the pseudo game flag has been set, this process ends without displaying the instruction monitor. In other words, in pseudo game, even if the push order bell has been won, the operation sequence that can achieve a bell win is not displayed on the instruction monitor. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S903, where a pseudo stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo stop enable command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have begun rotating at a constant speed in the pseudo game. Also, in step S903, lamps (not shown) on each stop switch 42-44 are lit to notify the player or the like that it is now possible to issue a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. Then, command transmission process 2 ends.

When command transmission process 2 is complete, proceed to step S410 and perform stop control processing.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the settlement switch 59 functions as a cancel operation means, so it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1008, where it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel in the pseudo game has been operated, i.e., whether a pseudo stop command has been issued. If a pseudo stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a pseudo stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step S1009, where a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol is obtained. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel spin counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104, where the pseudo game stop information is referenced. ROM 105 of the main control device 101 pre-stores a slide table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning the additional lottery, and a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning the pseudo game lottery. In step S1104, the slide table corresponding to the execution trigger of the pseudo game is referenced. Here, the slide table is a table that determines how far reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should slide (spin) from the timing when stop switches 42 to 44 are operated before a pseudo stop is made. In other words, a slide table is a group of stop data that can derive the relationship between the arrival symbol that reaches the base position when stop switches 42-44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually causes a pseudo-stop at that base position.

Figure 33 shows a slip table referenced in simulated gaming based on winning the bonus lottery. Symbols with a slip count of 0 are symbols that actually stop in the lower row. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 15 "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will stop without slipping, and the No. 16 "Red 7" symbol will stop in the middle row. Symbols with a non-zero slip count mean that the reel will slide the number of symbols indicated. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 11 "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will slide four symbols, and the No. 15 "Replay" symbol will stop in the lower row and the No. 16 "Red 7" symbol will stop in the middle row. In this way, in the slide table, the number of slides that will occur when the stop switches 42-44 are operated at the timing when the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the bottom row is set for each symbol number. In the slide table shown in Figure 33, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will pseudo-stop in the middle row, regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

Figure 34 is a slide table referenced in a pseudo game based on winning a pseudo game lottery. In this slide table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42-44, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M will pseudo-stop in the middle row, while the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will pseudo-stop in the bottom row instead of the middle row.

Returning to the explanation of the stop position determination process, in step S1105, a pseudo stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo stop command and which reel will be pseudo-stopped. In addition, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch that generated the pseudo stop command is turned off to notify the player that it is no longer possible to generate a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. In step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is obtained based on the referenced pseudo game stop information. Then, in step S1108, the obtained number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually pseudo-stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, proceed to step S1010, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter has not reached 0, return to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S1011 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012, where an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42-44 are in an operated state, the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S1014, where it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in a simulated game, the process waits for 100 msec in step S1016 and then ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, where it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S412, where transition preparation processing is performed to transition to the main game.

In the transition preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, a wait-for-operation timer is set in step S1201 (approximately 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In step S1202, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether the wait-for-operation timer has reached 0. The wait-for-operation timer is decremented in the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (step S108, see FIG. 10). If the wait-for-operation timer has not reached 0, processing returns to step S1202. If it is determined in step S1202 that the start lever 41 has been operated, or if it is determined in step S1203 that the wait-for-operation timer has reached 0, a post-pseudo-game flag is set in step S1204, and processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, once the transition preparation process is complete, return to step S402 and perform the spin start process.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, the repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-play flag, indicating that a pseudo-play has been performed, has been set. As described above, if a pseudo-play has been performed, the post-pseudo-play flag is set in the transition preparation process, so the process proceeds to step S603, where it is determined whether the push-order bell has been won. If the push-order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S604, where the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor. Also, in step S604, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation sequence command, the display control device 81 displays the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can result in a bell win on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the operation sequence is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 slightly after the operation sequence is displayed on the instruction monitor.

If the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604 or if it is determined in step S603 that the push order bell has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S605, where the delay time is acquired. RAM 106 of the main control unit 101 contains a delay timer for determining the start timing of each pseudo-stopped reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S605, a random number is acquired and a value corresponding to the acquired result (i.e., a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in the delay timer. The value of the delay timer is decremented in the timer decrement process of the timer interrupt process (step S108, see Figure 10). In step S606, the process waits until the value of the delay timer reaches 0. If the value of the delay timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S607, where the reel acceleration corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is initiated. In step S608, 1 is decremented from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, and if the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S610, where it is determined whether the post-pseudo-game flag has been set. If the post-pseudo-game flag has been set, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S611, and the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S612, after which the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information has been set. In step S403 after the simulated game has been played, a negative determination is made because stop information has already been set, and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. In step S405, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission process 1 is performed. In command transmission process 1 after the simulated game has been played, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the spin start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effects for the actual game, as shown in Figure 31 (d) etc.

In step S407, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating and are now rotating at a constant predetermined speed, the process proceeds to step S408, where an instruction monitor display process is performed.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, step S801 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S802 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S803 determines whether the pseudo game flag has been set. If the pseudo game flag has not been set, step S804 displays the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win on the instruction monitor, and this process ends. Also, in step S804, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. However, after a pseudo game has been played, the operation sequence has already been displayed on the instruction monitor during the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), so performing step S804 does not change the display content of the instruction monitor. In other words, step S804 can be said to be processing for displaying the instruction monitor during a game round in which a pseudo game is not played.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 have been explained in the reel control process for this game, so explanations will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, proceed to step S411, where it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, this process is terminated.

This slot machine 10 is configured to allow the pseudo game to be canceled and the game to be switched to the main game. This configuration will be explained in detail below based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, because the settlement switch 59 functions as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1003, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is 3, i.e., whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the above-mentioned instruction monitor display processing is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo-game end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the pseudo-game end command, the display control device 81 determines that the pseudo-game has been canceled. After that, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007 and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007 to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary effects for the pseudo game to the auxiliary effects for the main game.

Figure 35 shows an example of the rotation pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display pattern of the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo game is canceled.

In the notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man walking down a road, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the remaining payout amount until the notification mode ends. In Figure 35(a), a bell win occurred in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that 84 coins remain until the notification mode ends. When a pseudo game is being played, once each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, a notification prompting the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "red 7" symbol and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 35(b). At this time, the remaining payout amount until the notification mode ends is not displayed. If a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game transitions directly to the main game without any pseudo stops for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 35(c). At this time, the auxiliary display unit 65 ends the notification that the pseudo game is in progress without reporting the results of the pseudo game in more detail, such as whether or not an additional bonus has been awarded. It also displays an image of the young man character strolling down the road and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode, indicating that the pseudo game has transitioned to the main game. However, if the additional bonus lottery was won, the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184, as shown in Figure 35(c).

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation counter is not 3, i.e., if a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, a cancel operation flag indicating that a cancel operation has been performed is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1009, where stop position determination processing is performed to pseudo-stop the spinning reel. Then, in step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel rotation counter has not reached 0, this means that one remaining reel is spinning, so the process returns to step S1001, a positive determination is made in step S1001, and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag has been set. Then, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and stop position determination processing is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation counter has reached 0. If the reel spin counter value reaches 0, the cancel operation flag is cleared and processing from step S1011 onwards is carried out.

As described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game will proceed directly to the main game without pseudo-stopping all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the game will proceed to the main game after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1901, the above-mentioned termination determination process is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process was performed in the termination determination process of step S1901, and after sending a zone command in step S1908, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S1903 performs a net increase coin count update process to update the value of the net increase coin count counter. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase coin count counter, and the medal bet number (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is added to the subtraction result. Step S1904 determines whether the value of the net increase coin count counter has reached 0. If the value of the net increase coin count counter has not reached 0, step S1908 sends a zone command and then terminates this process. If the value of the net increase coin count counter has reached 0, steps S1905 to S1907 perform the favorable zone termination process, send a zone command in step S1908, and then terminate this process. In the favorable zone termination process, step S1905 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S1906 turns off the zone indicator 66. Step S1907 performs initialization processing in response to the end of the favorable zone. The initialization process initializes information related to instruction functions stored in the section information storage area 106d (such as the section game number counter value).

Here, we will explain the playability of this slot machine 10.

This slot machine 10 allows for two-coin and three-coin play. However, when two-coin play is performed in the normal zone, even if a winning combination is achieved, the player will not transition to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when two-coin play is performed in the advantageous zone, if the current play mode is the notification mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 will not be announced even if the push order bell is won. If the current play mode is the chance mode, no transition lottery will be held. In addition, in two-coin play, the mode game number counter, which triggers a transition to the notification mode, is not updated, while the interval game number counter, which triggers a transition to the normal zone, is updated (end determination process; see Figure 29). Furthermore, in two-coin play, there is an approximately 1 in 4.0 probability of winning BB2. If BB2 is achieved, the player must play 30 games to reduce their owned medals by 30. Therefore, when comparing two-coin play and three-coin play, three-coin play is more advantageous for the player.

When playing with three medals, there is a 1 in 12 chance of winning BB1, and if a BB1 win is achieved, it will be necessary to reduce the number of medals owned by 60 over 30 games. However, if a player plays with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over, the event of winning BB1 will not occur, and the event of winning BB2 will not occur either. Therefore, playing with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, below we will explain the gameplay when playing with three medals while the BB2 win flag is carried over.

In the normal zone, if you win any role when playing with three coins, you will have won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone. For example, in "Setting 3," there is approximately a 1 in 1.2 chance of winning any role, and an approximately 1 in 6.4 chance of losing. Therefore, playing with three coins in the normal zone will almost always complete one game.

When the game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode, and the transition game count is set to 700 (see Figure 26).

In chance mode, if a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to transition to notification mode. If the transition lottery is won, the game transitions from chance mode to notification mode. Even if the transition lottery is not won, if 700 three-coin plays have been performed in chance mode, the game transitions to notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see Figure 28). In other words, in this slot machine 10, when transitioning from the normal mode to chance mode, 700 plays functions as the so-called ceiling number. The advantageous zone ends when 1,500 plays have been performed or when the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400, regardless of the current play mode. When transitioning to notification mode based on reaching the ceiling of 700 plays, the remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone is 800. In notification mode, the operation order is always announced when the push order bell is won, so players can expect to gain approximately 3.5 coins per game. Assuming you can play 800 times in notification mode, you can expect to gain approximately 2,700 medals. Therefore, even if you switch to notification mode after reaching the ceiling, you can expect the difference in medals to reach 2,400 and the advantageous period to end before you play 1,500 times.

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, the net increase coin counter is set to 120 (see Figure 28). Therefore, when transitioning to notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the net increase coins (see Figure 30). At this time, if the additional lottery based on a watermelon win is won, 30, 50, 100, or 300 is added, and if the additional lottery based on a cherry win is won, 10, 20, 30, or 50 is added. Then, when the value of the net increase coin counter reaches 0, the notification mode and advantageous zone end, and the game transitions to the normal zone (see Figure 36).

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played in the game. In a pseudo game based on a bonus lottery win, the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop pseudo on the center line L2, and the number of coins added to the net increase coin counter is announced. Even if the player does not win the bonus lottery, if the player wins the pseudo game lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is played in the game. In a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win, the "red 7" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M stop pseudo on the center line L2, while the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R does not stop pseudo on the center line L2, and it is announced that the net increase coin counter will not be added. These pseudo games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game will proceed to the main game without any pseudo-stops on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R; if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the game will proceed to the main game after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have pseudo-stopped.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the additional lottery is won, a pseudo game is executed. In the pseudo game, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to spin, and when the stop switches 42-44 are operated, the corresponding reel comes to a pseudo stop. Then, when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have come to a pseudo stop, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the system to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the reels, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, it is possible that some players may find operating the stop switches 42-44 during a simulated game to be a hassle. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is designed to allow the simulated game to end if the settlement switch 59 is operated while the simulated game is in progress. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find operating the stop switches 42-44 during a simulated game to be a hassle from losing their motivation to play once the simulated game has begun.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the simulated game ends without any pseudo-stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This configuration makes it possible to configure the system so that the pseudo-stop results of the symbols in the simulated game cannot be known unless the stop switches 42-44 are operated during the simulated game, and makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the stop switches 42-44 during the simulated game.

When a pseudo game is executed, the actual game is executed after the pseudo game has ended. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped when the next game is started, even if the pseudo game could have ended without the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R coming to a pseudo stop. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, it is possible to move on to determining whether a stop command has been issued, without bringing the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to a pseudo stop or restarting their rotation. This allows for a swift transition from the pseudo game to the actual game.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, the pseudo game will end after all spinning reels have come to a pseudo-stop. This configuration allows a player who wishes to end the pseudo game midway through a pseudo game without operating the stop switches 42-44 to do so by operating the settlement switch 59, without operating the stop switches 42-44.

If the settlement switch 59 is operated during the execution of a simulated game, the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel spin counter. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the simulated game ends depending on the circumstances under which the settlement switch 59 is operated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped whenever the settlement switch 59 is operated. However, this configuration raises concerns that the significance of operating the stop switches 42-44 in the simulated game may be lost. This concern is more pronounced in configurations such as the present slot machine 10, where the stopping results of symbols in the simulated game do not depend on the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44. However, this concern can be effectively alleviated by configuring the subsequent processing to change depending on the value of the reel spin counter.

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo-game will be played. This configuration allows the pseudo-game to be used as a notification that the net increase in coins is increasing, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the simulated game, if the "red 7" symbol combination pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, an increase in the net increase in coins is notified, but if the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, an increase in the net increase in coins is not notified. This configuration allows players who want to be notified of an increase in the net increase in coins to operate stop switches 42-44, while allowing players who do not want to be notified of an increase in the net increase in coins to operate the settlement switch 59.

Furthermore, the results of the symbols stopping in the pseudo game do not directly contribute to the increase in the net increase in coins. In this game, unless a winning combination is achieved, players cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts. However, in the pseudo game, the increase in the net increase in coins has already been determined through an additional lottery, so the player does not suffer any disadvantage even if the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2. If the "red 7" symbol combination does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, the player simply is not notified that the net increase in coins will not increase. In this way, by making the pseudo game unrelated to the player's direct benefit, it is possible to position the pseudo game as a form of presentation in which players can actively participate, and it is possible to prevent players from suffering disadvantages by operating the settlement switch 59, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the player wins the bonus lottery, a pseudo game is played in that game. This configuration can increase the player's interest in the game. It is certainly possible to play a pseudo game in a game other than the one in which the bonus lottery was won. However, with this configuration, if the player forgets that they won a rare combination in a game before the pseudo game begins, there is a concern that the player may perceive the pseudo game as a fake and stop operating the stop switches 42-44 in an attempt to hit the "red 7" symbol. Furthermore, if the player wins a rare combination in the final game of the notification mode and the notification mode ends without winning the bonus lottery, there is a concern that the player may suspect that the bonus lottery was not played at all. On the other hand, if the pseudo game is played in the game in which the bonus lottery was won, the game flow will be pseudo game → actual game, which can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Even if a player does not win the bonus lottery, they can still play a pseudo game if they win the pseudo game lottery. This configuration makes it possible to provide opportunities in the pseudo game where an increase in the net increase in coins is notified and opportunities where an increase in the net increase in coins is not notified, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When a pseudo game is played, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the player that a pseudo game is being played. This configuration prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that one game has ended when the pseudo game has ended. Furthermore, even if the pseudo game transitions to the main game without all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R coming to a halt, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a main game.

When a pseudo game is played in a game in which the push order bell has been won, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42-44 in the pseudo game in the above operation sequence. Furthermore, the system is configured to notify the player of the above operation sequence after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped, but before the pseudo-stopped reels begin to accelerate. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42-44 in a different order from the above operation sequence in the actual game, which would result in the player being unable to win a bell.

In game times when a pseudo game is not being executed, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the timing of notification of the operation sequence in actual game times between game times when a pseudo game is being executed and game times when a pseudo game is not being executed. In this way, by ensuring that the operation sequence is notified before the operation of stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, and by differentiating the timing of notification of the operation sequence in actual game times depending on whether a pseudo game is being executed, it is possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo game ends, a delay time is set based on the random number obtained for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the reels begin accelerating after waiting for that delay time. This configuration makes it possible to stagger the start times of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when transitioning to the actual game. Even if the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped along the center line L2 during the pseudo game, the "red 7" symbols will no longer be lined up when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begin rotating at a constant speed. This prevents the stop results from the pseudo game from being used as a guide for pressing the buttons in the actual game that follows.

When an operation sequence that can result in a bell win is announced, it is announced on the auxiliary display unit 65 controlled by the display control device 81, and also on the instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101. Because the determination of whether the stop switches 42-44 have been operated is performed by the main control device 101, this configuration reliably avoids the occurrence of an event where it is necessary to determine whether the stop switches 42-44 have been operated before the operation sequence is announced.

The system is configured to determine that a cancellation operation has been performed on the simulated game when the settlement switch 59 is operated. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally performing a cancellation operation. For example, it is possible to configure the system to determine that a cancellation operation has been performed if the start lever 41 is operated after the simulated game has begun. However, with this configuration, if a player repeatedly presses the start lever 41 to issue a start command, the second and subsequent operations of the start lever 41 may be determined to be cancellation operations, which could result in the pseudo game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

When a pseudo game is executed, the stop information for the actual game is set after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has been spun, i.e., while the pseudo game is being executed. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the actual game, compared to a configuration in which the stop information for the actual game is set after the pseudo game has ended.

The pseudo-game stop information is configured to be set after a pseudo-stop command is issued. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the time required to determine whether a pseudo-stop command has been issued in a pseudo-game, even when the stop information is set while the pseudo-game is in progress.

On the other hand, if the pseudo game stop information is set after a pseudo stop command is issued, there is a possibility that the time between the issuance of the pseudo stop command and the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel may be extended. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo game based on a winning bonus lottery, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is pseudo-stopped in the middle row regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop switches 42-44. In the case of a pseudo game based on a winning pseudo game lottery, the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle row regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop switches 42-44, while the number 16 "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R is pseudo-stopped in the lower row instead of the middle row. In this way, by configuring the stopping results of symbols in a pseudo game to be independent of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, it is possible to prevent a long delay between the issuance of a pseudo stop command and the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel, even if the pseudo game stop information is set after the pseudo stop command is issued.

In the pseudo game, the reels are configured to slide a maximum of 19 symbols from the time the stop switches 42-44 are operated before a pseudo stop occurs. This configuration makes it possible to ensure time to set pseudo game stop information after a pseudo stop command is issued, and time to determine the reel stop position based on the pseudo game stop information. Furthermore, in this game, the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after a stop command is issued, so it is difficult to set stop information after a stop command is issued; instead, the stop information must be set before determining whether a stop command has been issued. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, the above restrictions are not imposed, and by configuring the reels to slide a maximum of 19 symbols before a pseudo stop occurs, it is possible to ensure each of the above times.

(Second embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the number of added coins is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of added coins may also be notified in the actual game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the reel control process.

In step S2001, a repetition counter stored in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a spin start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S2002. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S2005, where a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing role determination is created, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S2007, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. In step S2008, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant predetermined speed, proceed to step S2009 and perform instruction monitor display processing.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 38, step S2101 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S2102 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S2103 displays on the instruction monitor the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win, and this process ends. Also, in step S2103, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S2010, a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S2011, stop control processing is performed, and this process ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 39, in the stop control process, in step S2201, it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step 2202, where stop position determination processing is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 40, in step S2301, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation count counter. In step S2303, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. In addition, in step S2303, a lamp (not shown) of the stop switch for which the stop command has been issued is turned off to notify the player, etc., that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S2304, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: stopping the reaching symbol that has reached the base position; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding one symbol; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding two symbols; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding three symbols; and stopping the corresponding reel after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S2304, a slip count value of 0 to 4 is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S2305, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S2306, it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is equal to 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, i.e., if a stop command has not been issued for at least one reel, the stop information change process is performed in step S2307 and then the stop position determination process is terminated. If the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., if a stop command has been issued for all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process has ended, the process proceeds to step S2203, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S2201. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S2201 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reels are not stopped during the stop control process (normal processing), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, braking is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S2204 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, proceed to step S2205 to send an all-reel stop completion command to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S2206, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S2207, where an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 determines that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether an instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the brake process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing an additional coin notification display that notifies the number of additional coins.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the presentation determination process that is performed at the start of a game.

In step S2401, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received, and if not, this process is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2402, where it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is not notification mode, the process is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, the process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S2404, where a performance execution lottery is held. In the performance execution lottery, a win or loss is determined based on the type of rare role that has been won and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the performance execution lottery, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 10 chance of winning the performance execution lottery, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a 1 in 5 chance of winning the performance execution lottery. In step S2405, it is determined whether the performance execution lottery has been won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S2406 and this process ends. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S2407 and determines whether an add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is sent before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see Figures 12 and 30). Therefore, if an add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won for this game round. In this case, the effect flag is set in step S2406 and this process ends. If an add-on command has not been received, this process ends as is. Note that when the display control device 81 receives an add-on command, it stores the number of add-on coins indicated by the add-on command in an add-on coin number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the effect execution process that is carried out during the game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, this processing is terminated. If the effect flag is set, this means that an additional notification effect will be executed, so the processing proceeds to step S2502, where it is determined whether a stop command has been received. If a stop command has not been received, the processing waits until a stop command is received. If a stop command is received, the processing adds 1 to the value of the stop operation number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 in step S2503. In step S2504, it is determined whether the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3, and if it has not reached 3, in step S2505 an alarm sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64, and processing returns to step S2502. If the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3, in step S2506 an additional notification process is performed, and then this processing is terminated.

In the bonus notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, step S2601 determines whether an bonus command has been received, i.e., whether the bonus lottery has been won in the current game round. If the game round has won the bonus lottery, step S2602 waits until an all-reel stop completion command is received. If an all-reel stop completion command is received, step S2603 follows, and an alert sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter (3) is output from speaker 64. Then, step S2604 follows, and the process waits until an operation end command is received. If an operation end command is received, step S2605 follows, and the number of bonus coins won in the bonus lottery is displayed on auxiliary display unit 65. Then, step S2606 sets the value of the stop operation number counter to 0, and step S2607 clears the effect flag, terminating this process.

If it is determined in step S2601 that an add-on command has not been received, i.e., if the add-on lottery has not been won in this game round, the process proceeds to step S2608, where an alarm sound execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to output an alarm sound. In the alarm sound execution lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on a random number acquired by the display control device 81. The probability of winning the alarm sound execution lottery is approximately one in three. In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the alarm sound execution lottery has been won. If the alarm sound execution lottery has been won, the process waits in step S2610 until an all reels stop completion command is received. If an all reels stop completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2611, where an alarm sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this process ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, the effect flag is cleared in step S2607, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain the effect of the additional notification effects.

The bonus notification effect will be performed if you win the bonus lottery or if you win the effect execution lottery.

If the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery, it outputs a first sound alert (e.g., a "do" sound) when it receives a stop command based on the first stop command, and outputs a second sound alert (e.g., a "re" sound) when it receives a stop command based on the second stop command. Then, if it receives a stop command based on the third stop command, it outputs a third sound alert (e.g., a "mi" sound) after it receives an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, and displays the number of additional coins won in the additional lottery on the auxiliary display unit 65 after it receives an operation completion command indicating that all stop switches 42 to 44 have become untouched.

If the display control device 81 does not win the additional lottery, and receives a stop command based on the first stop command, it outputs a first alert sound (e.g., the note "do"); if it receives a stop command based on the second stop command, it outputs a second alert sound (e.g., the note "re"). If it receives a stop command based on the third stop command, and the alert sound execution lottery is won, it outputs a third alert sound (e.g., the note "mi") after receiving an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions; and if the alert sound execution lottery is not won, it does not output the third alert sound (e.g., the note "mi") after receiving the all-reel stop completion command.

As described above, in the bonus notification effect, if the bonus lottery is won, the sequence is as follows: first alert sound output → second alert sound output → third alert sound output → number of bonus coins announced; if the bonus lottery is not won, the sequence is as follows: first alert sound output → second alert sound output → third alert sound output, or first alert sound output → second alert sound output. Here, for example, in setting 3, the probability of winning the bonus lottery is approximately one in five if a watermelon is won, and approximately one in three if a cherry is won. The probability of winning the effect execution lottery is approximately one in ten if a watermelon is won, and approximately one in half if a cherry is won. Therefore, in the case of a watermelon win, when the first alert sound is output, i.e., when the bonus notification effect begins, the expected probability of the number of bonus coins being announced exceeds 66%. In the case of a cherry win, when the first alert sound is output, i.e., when the additional alert effect begins, the expected probability of the additional coins being announced exceeds 40%. Because the probability of winning the alert sound execution lottery is approximately one-third, when the third alert sound is output, the expected probability of the additional coins being announced becomes even higher than the rate mentioned above. Because the third alert sound is output after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, the player can continue to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command to their heart's content before ending it.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In the stop control process, once the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued has been determined, step S2201 is configured to determine whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This configuration allows the player to operate another stop switch without waiting for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, improving the operability of stop switches 42-44 can increase the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the system were configured to determine whether the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, new problems could arise, such as the next game being able to start before the reels have stopped. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is configured to perform a standby process that waits for 100 msec once the stop symbol numbers for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been determined. This configuration allows the reel oscillation to converge while the standby process is being performed, effectively eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The 100 msec standby process is performed after it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers. This configuration shortens the standby time, and even when standby processing is performed, it is possible to prevent the wait time until the next game can be started from being too long.

It is certainly possible to configure the system to perform standby processing before determining whether the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop symbol numbers when the reel spin counter is determined to have reached zero, i.e., between steps S2203 and S2204. However, in such a configuration, the standby time must consider not only the time for the reel oscillation to converge, but also the time required for the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on the reels to reach the stop symbol numbers (i.e., the reel slip time). Because this slot machine 10 can slide up to four symbols, it is necessary to reserve approximately 179 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 5) as standby time in addition to the time for the reel oscillation to converge. Furthermore, if the reels stop with three or fewer symbols instead of four, the standby time of approximately 36 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 1) or more would be wasted time, resulting in prolonged gameplay. On the other hand, if the system is configured to perform standby processing after it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers, it will be possible to effectively resolve the above concerns.

The system is configured to perform the 100 msec standby process after determining that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. This configuration makes it possible to standardize the time required until the next game turn can be started, even when standby processing is performed, thereby improving operability when starting the next game turn. For example, it is possible to perform standby processing after determining that the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, without providing process S2206, which determines whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. However, with this configuration, the time required until the next game turn can be started will vary depending on whether the player finishes operating all stop switches 42-44 after the standby process has ended or during the standby process. Furthermore, if the time required until the next round can begin changes, an event may occur in which, for example, when a player inserts a coin to start the next round, the operation is not accepted, reducing operability when starting the next round.

The standby process, which waits for 100 msec, is performed before the medal payout process. This configuration prevents the awarding of a special bonus, such as a medal payout, when the reel oscillation has not yet converged. Furthermore, by performing the standby process before the payout determination process performed during the medal payout process, the processing configuration can be simplified while increasing the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process. For example, if the payout determination process determines that a small win has been achieved, the standby process can be omitted or a standby process that waits for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out can be performed. If the payout determination process determines that a small win has not been achieved, the standby process can be performed for a predetermined time. This configuration prevents the delay before the next game can be started, since the standby time varies depending on whether or not a medal has been paid out. However, this configuration complicates the processing configuration, and when the processing program is applied to other slot machines that have different numbers of medals paid out when a small win is achieved, the processing time must be adjusted accordingly, reducing versatility.

In a configuration where a push order bell is included as a lottery feature and where operating the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order gives the player an advantage, the system is configured to issue stop commands consecutively without waiting for the reels to stop. This configuration reduces the chances that a player will unintentionally operate the stop switches 42-44 in the wrong order. In other words, in a configuration where operating the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order gives the player an advantage, players have sometimes unintentionally operated the stop switches 42-44 in the wrong order. This occurs when, for example, a player operates the stop switches 42-44 in the notified operation order, but then operates the second stop switch when the reel corresponding to the first stop command has not yet stopped. This operation is not recognized as valid, and the third stop switch operated is determined to be the operation of the second stop command.

The standby process, which waits for 100 msec, is configured to be performed after the operation sequence is hidden if it is currently being displayed on the instruction monitor. This configuration makes it possible to quickly end the notification of the operation sequence on the instruction monitor while shortening the standby time. This is because the standby time can be shortened by the time required for the processing of steps S2208 and S2209.

If the system were configured to determine whether the next stop command has been issued without waiting for the reels to stop, new problems could arise, such as the reel corresponding to the second stop command not stopping even after all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, or the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped but at least one stop switch has not been operated. If these problems arise, problems will arise in the control performed by the display control device 81. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, once the main control device 101 has determined the stop positions of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it determines whether the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, and it also determines whether all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state. When the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stop symbol numbers, an all-reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81, and when all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. With this configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control in response to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R having stopped upon receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can perform control in response to the end of operation of all stop switches 42-44 upon receiving the operation end command. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The main control device 101 is configured to send an operation end command after sending an all reels stop completion command. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to perform control in response to the completion of operation of all stop switches 42-44 after performing control in response to the completion of operation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, the maximum time required from determining the stop position of a reel for which a stop command is issued until the reel actually reaches the stop position can be determined by the main control device 101 to be approximately 179 msec, since the reel slides up to four symbols. On the other hand, the time required for all stop switches 42-44 to be in a state where they are not being operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be determined or predicted by the main control device 101. Therefore, by configuring the display control device 81 to send an operation end command after sending an all reels stop completion command, it is possible to reduce the time lag between the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the receipt of the all reels stop completion command.

When it is determined that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have matched the stop symbol numbers, an all-reel stop completion command is sent before determining whether all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state. This configuration reduces the lag between the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have entered a stopped state and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on receiving the all-reel stop completion command. Furthermore, when it is determined that all stop switches 42-44 have entered an unoperated state, an operation end command is sent before determining whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. This configuration reduces the lag between the timing when operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on receiving the operation end command.

The additional bonus notification effect is configured to progress when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and when all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and the additional bonus notification effect is controlled by the display control device 81. In this configuration, there is a concern that one of the carefully prepared effects may not be executed depending on which of the following occurs first: all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped or all stop switches 42-44 have been operated. To alleviate this concern, for example, a third notification sound may be output when either all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped or all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and an additional bonus notification may be executed when the other occurs. However, with such a configuration, the command type received from the main control device 101 will no longer correspond to the processing content to be executed, which could result in a new problem of the processing configuration related to the additional notification performance becoming more complex and requiring increased memory capacity.

On the other hand, by configuring the main control device 101 to send an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, and an operation end command indicating that operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended, the display control device 81 can determine that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can determine that operation of all stop switches 42-44 has ended by receiving the operation end command. Furthermore, because the main control device 101 sends the operation end command after sending the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 can control the output of a third alert sound upon receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and then control the execution of an additional alert upon receiving the subsequent operation end command. This effectively alleviates the above concerns.

In the additional notification effect, a third notification sound is output from speaker 64 upon receipt of an all reels stop completion command, and an additional notification is executed on auxiliary display unit 65 upon receipt of an operation end command. In this way, by configuring the device that executes the effect upon receipt of an all reels stop completion command and the device that executes the effect upon receipt of an operation end command to be different, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound even if the interval between receiving the all reels stop completion command and receiving the operation end command is short.

(Third embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in Figure 20, commands for pseudo-games and commands for actual games were prepared separately, and commands depending on the presence or absence of a pseudo-game flag were sent to the display control device 81. However, this configuration will be changed. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 44 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo game flag storage area provided in RAM 106 of the main control unit 101. The pseudo game flag storage area consists of one byte. The most significant bit 7 and bits 5 to 0 of the pseudo game flag storage area are blank, and the sixth bit functions as a pseudo game flag storage bit. When setting a pseudo game flag (step S504, see Figure 16), the main control unit 101 sets the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "1", and when clearing a pseudo game flag (step S611, see Figure 17 or step S1004, see Figure 21), it sets the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "0". Therefore, if each bit in the pseudo gaming flag storage area is arranged from the most significant bit to form an 8-digit binary number, and the resulting value is converted to hexadecimal, the result will be 40H (01000000) if the pseudo gaming flag is set, and 00H (00000000) if the pseudo gaming flag is not set.

Next, we will explain command transmission process 1 in this embodiment. Command transmission process 1 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S406, see Figure 15), and is a process of transmitting a spin start command or a pseudo-game spin start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 45, rotation start header information is obtained in step S2701.

Here, we will briefly explain the structure of a command. A command consists of a header that indicates the command type, a body that indicates the specific content, and a footer that indicates the final information in the command. The header consists of one byte, as shown in Figure 44 (b). The function of each bit in the header is as follows. The most significant bit, bit 7, functions as a header identification bit and always stores "1". Bit 6 functions as a pseudo-game identification bit that indicates whether or not a pseudo-game is being played, bit 5 is blank, and bits 4 to 0 function as command type storage bits that indicate the command type. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, or 10000110, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of main control unit 101.

If rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701, proceed to step S2702, where pseudo game judgment information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area also functions as pseudo game judgment information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 will be C6H (11000110), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 will be 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2705, and the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2706, after which this process ends. If body information is not present, the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2706, after which this process ends. Note that in command sending process 1, since no body information is set in the rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command), a header indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command) and the footer are sent to the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain command transmission process 2 in this embodiment. Command transmission process 2 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S409, see Figure 15), and is a process of transmitting a stop enable command or pseudo stop enable command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 46, stoppable header information is obtained in step S2801. The stoppable header information is 87H, i.e., 10000111, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of the main control unit 101. In step S2802, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to the stoppable header information, 87H. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo-game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 is C7H (11000111). If the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is sent to the display control unit 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2805, and the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2806, after which this processing ends. If body information is not present, the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2806, after which this processing ends. Note that in command sending processing 2, since no body information is set for the stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command), a header indicating that it is a stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command) and the footer are sent to the display control device 81.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the stop position determination process. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, a determination is made in step S1103 as to whether the pseudo game flag is set, and a pseudo stop command or a stop command is sent to the display control device 81 depending on the determination result (see Figure 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a determination is made in step S2903 as to whether the pseudo game flag is set, but regardless of the determination result, command transmission process 3 is performed in step S2905 to send a pseudo stop command or a stop command.

In command transmission process 3, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 48, stop header information is obtained in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, i.e., 10001000, and is pre-stored in ROM 105 of the main control unit 101. In step S3002, pseudo game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to the stop header information, 88H. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, i.e., if a pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 is C8H (11001000), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, i.e., if a real game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is sent to the display control unit 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether body information is present. If body information is present, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, and a footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this process ends. If body information is not present, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this process ends. In command transmission process 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel on which the stop command or pseudo-stop command has occurred is transmitted as body information. More specifically, if the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as body information; if the reel is the center reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as body information; and if the reel is the right reel 32R, 03H is transmitted as body information. These pieces of body information are pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101. As a result of the above, in command transmission process 3, a stop command (pseudo stop command) is transmitted to the display control device 81, which includes a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating the stopped reel (pseudo stopped reel), and a footer.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is configured to send different commands depending on whether a simulated game or a real game is being played. This configuration allows the display control device 81 to determine whether a simulated game or a real game is being played.

As a result of the above, the display control device 81 can control auxiliary effects according to simulated games and actual games, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

However, if the commands to be sent in the case of pseudo-games and the commands to be sent in the case of actual games are stored in ROM 105 in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. Furthermore, since it becomes necessary to determine whether a game is pseudo-game or not when sending a command, there is a concern that in addition to the increase in data volume due to the addition of this determination process, the processing configuration will also become more complicated.

In this embodiment, therefore, in command transmission process 1, etc., header information, such as the rotation start header information, is added to the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area to create a header to be sent to the display control device 81. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the header to be sent in the case of pseudo game, making it possible to reduce the amount of data. Furthermore, in this configuration, the created header includes whether or not it is pseudo game, so there is no need for processing to determine whether or not it is pseudo game. Therefore, simplifying the processing configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

The header is configured to include information indicating whether or not a game is a pseudo-game. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the commands sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 from becoming redundant. In other words, instead of performing a calculation as in this embodiment, the display control unit 81 can determine whether or not a game is a pseudo-game by sending 00H or 40H in the body rather than the header, for example. However, this configuration increases the length of the command sent by one byte, which would result in the command becoming redundant.

The header contains a header identification bit, a pseudo-game identification bit, and a command type storage bit, and is configured to fit into one byte. This configuration prevents commands from becoming redundant, while allowing the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header.

In the header, the pseudo game identification bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether or not a pseudo game is being played in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent commands sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 from becoming redundant. Furthermore, by creating header information by adding pseudo game determination information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not a pseudo game is being played in the header without changing the conventional header configuration. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in development man-hours for the slot machine 10.

The pseudo-game flag storage area is configured with one byte, the same as the header, and all bits except the sixth bit are left blank. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changing the values of other bits, such as the command type storage bit, when adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

The header is created using the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area. This configuration allows the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area to function as information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and as information used when creating the header. As a result, there is no need to provide a storage area in RAM 106 for storing pseudo-game determination information, which makes it possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was used in which a simulated game was performed, but it is also possible to perform only the actual game without performing a simulated game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 49 is an oblique view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

A presentation switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45. The presentation switch 67 is operated when a press-down presentation, described below, is executed, or when a menu screen is called up when no game is being played, and has the word "PUSH" displayed on its top surface. The selection switch 68 is made up of four switches - an up switch, a down switch, a left switch, and a right switch - that specify the up, down, left, and right directions, and is operated to select desired information from the various information displayed on the menu screen. The presentation switch 67 (more specifically, the presentation switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the presentation switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are connected to the display control device 81, as shown in FIG. 50.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the reel control process.

In step S3101, a repetition counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels begins according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, if the value of the repetition counter is 3, the spin start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained; if the value of the repetition counter is 2, the spin start setting table address for the center reel 32M is obtained; and if the value of the repetition counter is 1, the spin start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the obtained spin start setting table.

If a spin start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is obtained in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103, where 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter has reached 0. If the value of the repetition counter has not reached 0, the process returns to step S3102. If the value of the repetition counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to step S3105, where a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information corresponding to the result of the winning/losing role determination is created, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, the reel spin counter provided in RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S3107, a spin start command is sent to the display control device 81. In step S3108, it is determined whether any reels are accelerating. If any reels are accelerating, the process waits until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have finished accelerating. When acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has finished and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant predetermined speed, proceed to step S3109 and perform instruction monitor display processing.

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 52, step S3201 determines whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is notification mode, proceed to step S3202 to determine whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, step S3203 displays on the instruction monitor the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that will result in a bell win, and this process ends. Also, in step S3203, an operation sequence command indicating the operation sequence to be notified is sent to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, this process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S3110, a stop possible command is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S3111, stop control processing is performed, and this process ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 53, in the stop control process, in step S3301, it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step 3302, where stop position determination processing is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is obtained. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is obtained based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation count counter. In step S3403, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. In addition, in step S3403, a lamp (not shown) of the stop switch for which the stop command has been issued is turned off to notify the player, etc., that it is no longer possible to issue a stop command in this game. In the following step S3404, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: stopping the reaching symbol that has reached the base position; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding one symbol; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding two symbols; stopping the corresponding reel after sliding three symbols; and stopping the corresponding reel after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S3404, a slip count value of 0 to 4 is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S3405, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S3406, it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter is equal to 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, i.e., if a stop command has not been issued for at least one reel, the stop information change process is performed in step S3407 and then the stop position determination process is terminated. If the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., if a stop command has been issued for all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, once the stop position determination process has ended, the process proceeds to step S3303, where it is determined whether the value of the reel spin counter has reached 0. If the value of the reel spin counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. In other words, once the slot machine 10 has determined the stop symbol number of the reel for which a stop command has been issued, it determines in step S3301 whether a next stop command has been issued, regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been issued has actually stopped. This allows the player to issue successive stop commands without waiting for the reel to stop. Note that the reel is not stopped during the stop control process (normal processing), but during the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the arrival symbol on the reel for which the stop command has been issued is equal to the stop symbol number, and if so, brake processing is performed to stop the reel for which the stop command has been issued.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation counter is 0, this means that the stop pattern numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, so proceed to step S3304 to determine whether the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not become stop pattern numbers, the process waits until the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become stop pattern numbers. If the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become stop pattern numbers, proceed to step S3305 to send an all-reel stop completion command to the display control device 81. By receiving the all-reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 determines that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions. In the following step S3306, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is ON, this means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, and the process continues to wait. If all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, the process proceeds to step S3307, where an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 determines that all stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether an instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the reel oscillation to converge.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 that are relevant to the present invention. To briefly explain the processing configuration of the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, the display control device 81 performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically. The timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is executed approximately every 10 msec. In addition, the display control device 81 receives various commands, such as lottery result commands, sent from the main control device 101 to grasp the progress of the game, and initiates the corresponding processing.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether an operation end command has been received. If an operation end command has not been received, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if an operation end command has been received, this means that all stop switches 42-44 have not been operated, i.e., the operation to issue stop commands to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3502, where the standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 18,000. The value of the standby timer is decremented by one in the timer interrupt process. Since the timer interrupt process is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer will reach 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether the effect flag has been set. If the effect flag has not been set, this process is terminated.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the start wait processing. The start wait processing is performed during the main processing, and is executed upon receiving an operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3603, where it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S3604, where it is determined whether the value of the standby timer has reached 0. If the value of the standby timer has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step S3605, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the main control unit 101 transmits a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control unit 81 during the medal insertion process, which is performed when medals are inserted or credit insertion switches 56-58 are operated. The display control unit 81 determines whether the number of bets is 0 based on the number of bets indicated by the received bet number command or whether a bet number command has not been received. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, a selection menu execution process is performed. In this slot machine 10, the following selection menus are displayed on the menu screen: game history, payout table, volume adjustment, clear game history, and end menu. In the selection menu execution process, if the selection switch 68 is operated, a process is performed to highlight the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68. If the effect switch 67 is operated, a process is performed to execute the highlighted selection menu. In step S3703, it is determined whether the effect switch 67 was operated when end menu was selected, i.e., whether a menu end operation has been performed. If a menu end operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S3704, where it is determined whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3702, and the selection menu execution process continues. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that a menu end operation has been performed, the menu end processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and other screens displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are hidden and the normal screen is displayed. In the following step S3706, the standby timer is set to 18,000. After that, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, this means that the player performed an operation to start the next game round (betting medals or virtual medals) while the menu screen and other screens were displayed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S3707, where the menu termination process described above is performed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of the start command waiting process described below.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the waiting timer has reached 0, waiting processing is performed in step S3607.

In the standby process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, the customer waiting effect is initiated in step S3801. In the customer waiting effect, a predetermined demo movie (attract effect) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that instead of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, the system may transition to power saving mode and display "power saving" on the auxiliary display unit 65. Alternatively, the system may transition to power saving mode by reducing the brightness of the auxiliary display unit 65 without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3804, and the standby timer is set to 18,000 in step S3805. The process then proceeds to step S3701 of the menu process. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect ends in step S3806, and the waiting timer is set to 18,000 in step S3807. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of the start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start command waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, step S3901 determines whether a start command has been received. The start command is a command sent from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81, and is sent when it is determined in step S206 (see FIG. 11) of normal processing that a start command has been generated. If a start command has not been received, step S3902 determines whether the number of bets is 0. If the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, step S3903 sets the standby timer to 18,000, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. A typical example of a situation in which the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when a player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that a start command has been received, this means that a game has started, and the process proceeds to in-game processing in step S3904. A detailed explanation of the in-game processing will be omitted, but in-game processing, for example, if a push order bell is won in notification mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning.

As described above, when the effect switch 67 is operated while no game is being played, the display control device 81 displays the menu screen on the auxiliary display unit 65, and when the value of the standby timer reaches 0, it starts the customer waiting effect.

In this slot machine 10, if the player wins the additional draw while in notification mode, a press effect is performed in which the player operates the effect switch 67 after all stop switches 42-44 have been operated, and the number of additional coins is notified. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a press effect.

Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed during the in-game processing described above. The effect determination process is performed at the start of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received, and if not, this process is terminated. If a lottery result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4002, where it is determined whether the current game mode is notification mode. If the current game mode is not notification mode, the process is terminated. If the current game mode is notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, the process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S4004, where a performance execution lottery is held. In the performance execution lottery, a win or loss is determined based on the type of rare role that has been won and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the performance execution lottery, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 10 chance of winning the performance execution lottery, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a 1 in 5 chance of winning the performance execution lottery. In step S4005, it is determined whether the performance execution lottery has been won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S4006 and this process ends. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4007 and determines whether an add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is sent before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see Figures 12 and 30). Therefore, if an add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won for this game round. In this case, the effect flag is set in step S4006 and this process ends. If an add-on command has not been received, this process ends as is. Note that when the display control device 81 receives an add-on command, it stores the number of add-on coins indicated by the add-on command in an add-on coin number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81.

When operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed, an operation end command is sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives an operation end command, it determines in step S3303 of the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55 that the effect flag is set, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the effect switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a press display is initiated to prompt the player to operate the effect switch 67. In the following step S3305, 1000 is set to a first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Note that the value of the first timer is decremented by 1 in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. If the first timer has been set to 1000, the operation end command processing is terminated.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 56, if the effect flag is set, a positive determination is made in step S3601 and press effect processing is performed in step S3602.

In the press effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, step S4101 determines whether effect switch 67 has been operated, and if effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process remains in standby. If effect switch 67 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S4102, where a result flag is set. Here, the result flag is a flag used to start a result display that notifies the player of the number of coins added if the player has won the additional coin lottery, or that no coins will be added if the player has not won the additional coin lottery.

Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the result display process performed during timer interrupt processing by the display control device 81.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, in step S4202, the result flag is cleared, and in step S4203, the display flag is set. In step S4204, a display counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Note that the ROM of the display control device 81 pre-stores result display image data to be executed if the additional lottery has been won, and result display image data to be executed if the additional lottery has not been won. The result display image data is composed of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200. In step S4205, result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is obtained, and the image data associated with 0 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If an image corresponding to the value of the display counter has been displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4206, where it is determined whether the display flag is set. If neither the result flag nor the display flag is set, this means that the result display is not being performed, and the process terminates. On the other hand, if the display flag is set, this means that the result display is being performed, and therefore in step S4207, 1 is added to the display counter value, and in step S4208, an image corresponding to the display counter value is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether the display counter value has reached 200. If the display counter value has not reached 200, this means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, i.e., the result display has been performed to the end, so in step S4210, the display flag is cleared, and in step S4211, the completion flag is set. In step S4212, a second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 300. The value of the second timer is decremented by one during timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing occurs approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer will reach 0 after approximately 3 seconds. If the second timer is set to 300, the result display processing will end.

As described above, when a result flag is set during the press performance process, the result display process is initiated during the timer interrupt process approximately every 10 msec, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. Furthermore, when the result display is executed to the end, the final image data of the result display image data continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the process transitions to the menu process, standby process, or start command wait process described above (see Figure 56).

Returning to the explanation of the press performance processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer has reached 0. If the value of the first timer has not reached 0, the process waits until the value of the first timer reaches 0. If the value of the first timer reaches 0, this means that approximately 10 seconds have passed since the start of the press display. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4104, where it is determined whether the completion flag has been set. If the completion flag has been set, this means that the result display has been completed, so the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag has not been set, this means that the result display is still in progress, so the process proceeds to step S4107, where the process waits until the value of the second timer reaches 0. To explain in more detail, in step S4107, the display counter value is 20, and the process waits until the value of the second timer reaches 0. If the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing ends.

Here, we will explain in detail what happens after pressing the display.

When a push-button display is displayed, the push-button display continues on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the effect switch 67 is operated. If the effect switch 67 is operated while the push-button display is being displayed, the result display begins. It takes approximately two seconds to display the result to completion.

Here, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the result display can be completed within approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is also set when the value of the first timer reaches 0, so the press display process immediately ends and processing moves to step S3603 of the start wait process. The value of the second timer is not referenced at this time. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the operation of the effect switch 67 to display the menu screen (hereinafter also referred to as the "menu start operation") becomes effective approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press display.

If the effect switch 67 is operated between approximately 8 and 10 seconds after the start of the push display, this occurs during the result display, approximately 10 seconds after the push display began. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set when the value of the first timer reaches 0, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start wait process after the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated between approximately 8 and 10 seconds after the push display begins, the menu start operation becomes effective 3 seconds after the result display has been executed to the end, that is, approximately 5 seconds after the effect switch 67 is operated.

If the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 10 seconds or more after the start of the push display, the completion flag will not be set when the value of the first timer reaches 0 (the result display will not have started), so the result display will be executed to completion and the process will proceed to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 10 seconds or more after the push display has started, the menu start operation will become effective 3 seconds after the result display has been executed to completion, i.e., approximately 5 seconds after the effect switch 67 is operated.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In conventional slot machines, menu processing is not performed after a game in which an auxiliary effect, such as the above-mentioned press effect, is executed as a trigger for operating an effect switch; in other words, the menu screen is not displayed even when the effect switch is operated. In such a configuration, if a player wants to display the menu screen, they must continue playing until a game in which a press effect is not executed occurs, which can be frustrating for players.

In this embodiment, therefore, the menu processing is executed even after a game in which a press effect is executed. This configuration increases the opportunities for the menu screen to be displayed at the timing desired by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When the push display is initiated, the menu start operation is either enabled when the value of the first timer reaches 0, or enabled when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, reaches 0. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the menu start operation is enabled depending on the start timing of the result display, i.e., the operation timing of the effect switch 67. This reduces the chances of players becoming frustrated when the menu screen does not appear even after operating the effect switch 67.

It is certainly possible to configure the menu start operation to become valid after a game in which a press effect has been executed by configuring the menu start operation to become valid after a certain period of time, such as three seconds, has elapsed since the result display was completed. However, with such a configuration, it is possible that players may become irritated by having to wait three seconds. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the menu start operation to become valid immediately after the result display is completed. However, this configuration creates a new problem in that the menu screen may be displayed at a time unintended by the player. This is because if the result display is completed and the player operates the effect switch 67 again in the hope of further development of the effect, such as a so-called reversal effect, the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 will switch from the press effect to the menu screen.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, where the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first or second timer, a grace period can be set between the completion of the result display and the menu start operation becoming valid, unless the effect switch 67 is operated approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display. The existence of this grace period makes it possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player. This may lead to player frustration at having to wait the grace period, but the length of the grace period varies depending on the timing of the operation of the effect switch 67. This makes it possible to have the player operate the effect switch 67 while feeling curious, wondering if the menu start operation has already been enabled this time. This makes it possible to reduce player frustration.

As a result of the above, the slot machine 10 is able to effectively resolve the above-mentioned concerns, reducing the chances that players will feel frustrated when the menu screen does not appear even when they operate the effect switch 67.

When the value of the first timer reaches 0, if a completion flag indicating that the results display has been completed is set, the menu start operation is enabled. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the menu start operation from being enabled in the middle of the results display.

The first timer is configured to be set to 1000. When the push display begins, it is generally expected that the time required from when the player recognizes the push display until they actually operate the effect switch 67 will be within 5 seconds, even if they operate it while hoping that the number of coins added will be announced. Since it takes approximately 2 seconds to complete the result display, setting the first timer to 1000 reduces the chance of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated within approximately 8 seconds of the start of the push display, the menu start operation will become effective approximately 10 seconds later. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the effect switch 67 while reducing the chance of a long delay between the push display and the result display.

The second timer is configured to set the value to 300. If the result display has not been completed approximately 10 seconds after the start of the push display, it is possible that the player has not operated the effect switch 67 due to leaving the seat, etc. In such cases, the menu start operation is configured to become valid approximately 3 seconds after the result display has been completed, thereby reducing the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a time unintended by the player.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the notification mode was configured to end based on the net increase in coins played, but it may also be configured to end based on the number of games played. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

First, we will explain the processing performed by the main control unit 101.

The processing performed by the main control unit 101 in the normal zone is the same as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the normal zone, if you win any role when playing with three coins, you will have won the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone. For example, in the case of "Setting 3," there is approximately a 1 in 1.2 chance of winning any role, and an approximately 1 in 6.4 chance of losing. Therefore, playing three coins in the normal zone will end in approximately one game. Then, when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode, and the number of transition games is set to 700 (see Figure 26).

In chance mode, the processing performed by the main control unit 101 differs from that of the first embodiment in terms of game section processing.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S4301, and after sending a zone command in step S4311, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S4303 and determine whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S4304, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S4305, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode has been won, so in step S4306, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S4308, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag. In the following step S4309, the transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, in step S4311, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4307, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S4311, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an announcement flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, the transition game count counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S4311, and this processing ends.

If step S4303 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S4311 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S4402, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S4403, where an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that an additional number of games will be won, either 50, 100, or 300, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that an additional number of games will be won, 50. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S4405, where a subsequent notification lottery is held to determine whether or not the number of additional games will be announced in a game subsequent to the current game. In the subsequent notification lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is a win or a loss. If the subsequent notification lottery is not won, an additional flag is set in step S4407, and an additional command is sent in step S4408. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that the additional lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then ends. On the other hand, if the subsequent notification lottery is won, a subsequent notification command is sent in step S4410 without setting the additional flag. Here, the subsequent notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that the subsequent notification lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Then, this process ends. If the bonus lottery is not won, this process ends. Also, if the current game is a two-coin game instead of a three-coin game, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without performing the bonus lottery.

As described above, if the add-on lottery is won, an add-on command or a subsequent notification command is sent to the display control device 81. If the add-on flag is set and an add-on command is sent, the number of added games is announced in the pseudo-game, as described in the first embodiment above (see Figure 31). Also, if a subsequent notification command is sent without setting an add-on command, the number of added games is announced in the revival effect described below. Note that if the pseudo-game lottery is won when a subsequent notification command has been sent (see Figure 16), the number of added games is announced in the revival effect, not in the pseudo-game.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4501, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S4501, and after sending a zone command in step S4508, this process is terminated.

If the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, step S4503 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S4504 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the favorable zone end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and an interval command is sent in step S4508, terminating this processing. In the favorable zone end processing, step S4505 changes the gaming zone flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S4506 turns off the interval indicator 66. In step S4507, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the favorable zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the interval information storage area 106d (for example, the interval game number counter value, etc.).

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process proceeds to step S4509, where it determines whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is not set, it determines in step S4510 whether the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50. The number of games remaining in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process proceeds to step S4511, where it determines whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. If the number of games remaining in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the completion flag is set in step S4512, and the transition game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4513. When 1500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, or when the difference number in the advantageous zone reaches 2400, the advantageous zone ends regardless of the play mode at that time. Therefore, if the transition game number counter is set to 1500 when the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous zone and notification mode will end when the difference number in the advantageous zone reaches 2400. In step S4514, a completion command indicating that the end has been confirmed when the difference number reaches 2400 is sent to the display control device 81. Then, in step S4508, an interval command is sent, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4509 that the completion flag is set, if it is determined in step S4510 that the number of games remaining in the notification mode is 50 or less, or if it is determined in step S4511 that the value of the difference number counter is 2200 or less, then the section command is sent in step S4508 and then this processing is terminated.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effects on the auxiliary display unit 65 when moving from the notification mode (advantageous zone) through the normal zone and then to the chance mode (advantageous zone). Therefore, below, the various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be explained in accordance with the flow of the game.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from chance mode to notification mode.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing section command processing in notification mode. Section command processing is initiated when a section command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated after the game has ended.

In step S4601, it is determined whether the current game was a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game section memory area that stores information about the game section indicated by the section command. The game section memory area is composed of a first area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the current game, and a second area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the previous game. In step S4601, if information indicating chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game was a transition game to the notification mode. In step S4602, a start flag is set. In step S4603, a display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and in step S4604, a post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S4605, a transition notification process is performed, and this process ends. By performing the transition notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display, as shown in Figure 73(a), that notification mode will begin from the next game and that the number of games that can be played in notification mode is 50.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing start command processing in the notification mode. When the main control device 101 determines that a start command has been issued (step S206, see Figure 11), it transmits a start command to the display control device 81. The start command processing is initiated when a start command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S4701, it is determined whether the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, this means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode. Therefore, in step S4702, the start flag is cleared, and in step S4703, the value of the displayed game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, as shown in Figure 73 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of a young man character strolling along the road and that there are 50 games remaining in the notification mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the control to notify the operation order when the push order bell is won is performed in the lottery result command processing that is activated when the lottery result command is received (step S310, see Figure 12).

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is not received in notification mode.

In the section command processing that is initiated after the game ends, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S4606, where it is determined whether a finish command has been received. If a finish command has not been received, step S4610 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of displayed games counter, and step S4611 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 1. If the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 1, step S4613 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 0, and if the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 0, the process terminates.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter has reached 1, this means that the next game will be the final game in the notification mode, at least in terms of the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the end flag is set in step S4612, and this processing ends.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the display game number counter has reached 0, this means that the player won the subsequent notification lottery in any of the games up until the value of the display game number counter reached 0. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode ends, the main control unit 101 sends an interval command indicating a normal interval rather than an interval command indicating that the mode is notification (see FIG. 65). In such a case, a revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the subsequent notification game number counter is set to the display game number counter in step S4615. Note that, when a subsequent notification command indicating that the player has won the subsequent notification lottery is received, the subsequent notification game number counter is incremented by the additional number of games indicated by the subsequent notification command. Thereafter, in step S4616, the subsequent notification game number counter is set to 0, and this processing ends.

In the start command processing that is activated at the start of a game, as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is determined in step S4704 whether the end flag is set. If the end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4707, where it is determined whether the revival flag is set. If the revival flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4710, where it is determined whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the displayed game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4712, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is reduced by one each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game will be the final game in the notification mode, at least in terms of the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an end screen in step S4706, terminating this processing. By performing this processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the fact that the notification mode has ended and the current number of medals won (e.g., 800), i.e., the difference in medals from the end of the previous game. Note that the lottery result command is received after the start command is received. However, if a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the operation sequence that can result in the bell winning in addition to displaying the end screen. For example, when a lottery result command indicating that the center left and right bells have been won is received, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display the end of the notification mode, the current number of medals won, and the operation sequence "213", as shown in Figure 73 (d).

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag is set, this means that the subsequent notification lottery has been won, meaning that there is an additional number of games that have not yet been notified. In such a case, the revival flag is cleared in step S4708, and the revival effect processing is performed in step S4709, and this processing ends. By performing the revival effect processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays, as shown in Figure 73(e), that the notification mode will continue and the number of additional games that were won in the subsequent notification lottery (for example, 50 games), and then the normal screen in the notification mode shown in Figure 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, if a completion command is not received in notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of a game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display unit 65 reaches 0. If the subsequent notification lottery is won, a revival effect is performed at the start of the next game after the end screen is displayed to notify the player that notification mode will continue.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is received in notification mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S4606, where it is determined whether a finish command has been received. If a finish command has been received, this means that it has been confirmed that the game will end with a difference of 2400 coins. In this case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and the displayed game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4608. Thereafter, ending notification processing is performed in step S4609, and this processing ends. By performing the ending notification processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that the ending video will begin from the next game.

When processing section commands in a game after a finish command is received, step S4610 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of displayed games counter, and step S4611 determines whether the value of the number of displayed games counter has reached 1. As described above, when processing section commands when a finish command is received, step S4608 sets the number of displayed games counter to 1,500. Therefore, when processing section commands in a game after a finish command is received, step S4611 determines that the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 1. For the same reason, step S4613, which is the step to proceed from step S4611, also determines that the value of the number of displayed games counter has not reached 0, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 67, the start command processing that is activated when the game starts determines whether the ending flag is set in step S4710. If the ending flag is set, ending execution processing is performed in step S4711, and then this processing ends. The ending execution processing involves displaying a specified ending video on the auxiliary display unit 65.

As described above, if it is determined that the notification mode will end with a difference of 2,400 coins, a specified ending video will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the next game until the notification mode and advantageous period end.

This section explains the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from notification mode to normal mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 68, step S4801 determines whether the current game was a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it determines whether information indicating a notification mode is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and whether information indicating a normal section is stored in the first area. If the current game was a transition game to the normal section, proceed to step S4802, where the continued game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. Then, this processing ends. If the current game was not a transition game to the normal section, step S4803 adds 1 to the value of the continued game number counter, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 69, the start command processing that is activated when the game starts determines in step S4901 whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, this means that a predetermined ending video has been displayed in the notification mode. In this case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and a process is performed to display an ending screen on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4903. Thereafter, the continuation flag is set in step S4904, and this process ends. By performing the above process, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the fact that the notification mode has ended and the number of medals acquired at the time the notification mode ended.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4905, where it is determined whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is not set, the process sets the continuation flag in step S4906 and then proceeds to step S4907. If the continuation flag is set, the process proceeds directly to step S4907. In step S4907, processing is performed to continue displaying the ending screen. Thereafter, this processing ends. Note that in step S4907, processing to change and display the number of medals acquired is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends due to a difference of 2,400 coins, the notification mode end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the first game of the normal interval until the end of the normal interval. When the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game count, the notification mode end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 from the final game of the notification mode until the end of the normal interval.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the normal interval. Lottery result command processing is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether any winning combination has been achieved in the current game. If any winning combination has been achieved in the current game, this means that the player has won the lottery for transitioning to chance mode, i.e., the player will transition to chance mode from the next game, and this processing is then terminated. On the other hand, if no winning combination has been achieved in the current game, i.e., the normal mode will continue into the next game, the processing proceeds to step S5002, where it is determined whether the value of the continued game counter is less than 6. If the value of the continued game counter is less than 6, a suggestion jewel selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggestion jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting status of the slot machine 10 and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. Incidentally, in the suggestion jewel selection lottery, in setting 1 or setting 2, a blue jewel is selected 40% of the time, a yellow jewel is selected 30% of the time, a green jewel is selected 20% of the time, and a red jewel is selected 10% of the time. In the case of setting 3 or 4, blue orbs are selected 20% of the time, yellow orbs are selected 30% of the time, green orbs are selected 30% of the time, and red orbs are selected 20% of the time. In the case of setting 5 or 6, blue orbs are selected 10% of the time, yellow orbs are selected 20% of the time, green orbs are selected 30% of the time, and red orbs are selected 40% of the time. Note that the selection rates may be different for each setting from setting 1 to setting 6. In step S5004, a process is performed to display the selection result of the suggestion orb selection lottery on the auxiliary display unit 65. This process then terminates. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the continued game counter is 6 or greater, the process proceeds to step S5005, where a fixed orb indicating the setting status of the slot machine 10 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This process then terminates. For example, when a process to display a fixed orb is performed on a slot machine 10 with setting 6, an end screen and an orb labeled 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 73(f).

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the all reels stop completion command processing during the normal interval. The all reels stop completion command processing is initiated when an all reels stop completion command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the end of the game.

In the all reels stop completion command processing, in step S5101, the suggested jewels or confirmed jewels displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are hidden, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the normal section, if the game does not transition to chance mode, suggestion jewels will be displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the first five games, and fixed jewels will be displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the sixth game and beyond. Here, the probability of not transitioning to chance mode, i.e., the probability of a miss, is approximately 1 in 6.4. Therefore, players who want to guess the setting from the appearance of suggestion jewels or players who want to understand the setting status from the fixed jewels, need to play in a way that increases the number of plays in the normal section.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the normal mode to the chance mode.

In the section command processing that is activated after the end of a game, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 68, step S4801 determines whether the current game was a transition game to chance mode. More specifically, it determines whether information indicating a normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and whether information indicating chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game was a transition game to chance mode, proceed to step S4802, and set 1 to the continued game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Then, this processing ends. If the current game was not a transition game to chance mode, step S4803 adds 1 to the value of the continued game number counter, and this processing ends.

As shown in the flowchart in Figure 72, the start command processing that is activated at the start of the game determines in step S5201 whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, this means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is hidden in step S5203. Thereafter, in step S5204, the value of the continued game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this processing ends. By performing this processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image of the young man character strolling into the distance on the road and the number of games in chance mode, as shown in Figure 73 (g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, the value of the continued game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S5205, and the process ends. By performing this process, the auxiliary display unit 65 will increment the number of games played by one each time a game is played.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If the notification mode ends when the difference in coins reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2400, i.e., the first game of the normal interval. If the notification mode ends when the transition game count is exhausted, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. In this way, by varying the game in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the end condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

When the notification mode ends because the difference in coins reaches 2,400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2,400. This configuration makes it possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games when the notification mode has not ended. It is certainly possible to configure the end screen to be displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in coins reaches 2,394 or more. However, with this configuration, an event may occur in which the difference in coins does not reach 2,400 and the notification mode does not end, even though the end screen is displayed, in cases such as when the push order bell is not selected, or when the push order bell is selected but the stop switches 42-44 are not operated in the notified operation sequence. If this event occurs, the end screen will continue to be displayed until the difference in coins reaches 2,400 and the notification mode ends.

If the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in number of coins is greater than 2200, the value of the transition game counter is changed so that the difference in number of coins reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game from various perspectives.

First, if the advantageous zone is configured to simply end when the difference in coins reaches 2,400, some players may lose interest in playing when the advantageous zone (notification mode) ends when the difference in coins reaches 2,400, thinking that they could have won even more medals if there was no limit on the number of medals. This is because it is rare for the difference in coins to reach 2,400 when the number of remaining games reaches 0. On the other hand, this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in coins is greater than 2,200, allows players to play in the notification mode with the goal of reaching the difference in coins of 2,200. Furthermore, since the expected increase in coins per game in the notification mode is approximately 3.5 coins, if the difference in coins exceeds 2,200 when the number of remaining games is 57 or less, this is equivalent to winning the bonus lottery. This is because the expected number of games required to increase by 200 coins is 58. As a result of the above, even if an upper limit is set on the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone, it is possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play and increase their interest in the game.

Next, when the notification mode is terminated based on the difference in number of coins, as described above, the timing of the notification mode's termination will vary depending on the results of the lottery, etc. Therefore, in a configuration in which the notification mode's termination condition is determined by the number of games played, it is difficult to execute an ending effect across multiple games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference in number of coins is greater than 2,200, it is possible to determine in advance that the difference in number of coins will reach 2,400 and the notification mode will end. Therefore, the number of games played from when the value of the transition game counter is changed until the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400 can be secured as the number of games required to display the ending video. This makes it possible to execute an ending effect in an optimal manner. Furthermore, the ending effect can notify the player that they have completed the advantageous zone, and allows the player to play while feeling a sense of superiority until the difference in number of coins actually reaches 2,400. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when an ending effect is executed, the ending screen is displayed during the first game of the normal section, allowing the player to enjoy the ending effect until the next game begins, and to play the next game while immersed in the afterglow of the ending effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, the final game of the notification mode will not be delayed due to the results of the lottery, etc. This makes it possible to avoid the end screen being displayed for multiple games even when the notification mode has not ended.

If the player wins the subsequent notification lottery, a revival effect is performed in the next game after the end screen is displayed, and the number of additional games is notified. This configuration allows the player to operate the start lever 41 to issue a command to start the next game while hoping that the notification mode will continue when the end screen is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Now, consider the case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the notification mode has ended, just as when the notification mode ends with a difference of 2400 coins. In this configuration, the play interval of the game that displayed the end screen is already the normal interval, so even if a rare combination is won in that game, no additional lottery is held, and an event that revives the notification mode cannot occur (see Figures 25 and 26). On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which displays the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, since that game is in the notification mode, if a rare combination is won, an additional lottery and a subsequent notification lottery can be held to produce a revival effect. Therefore, it is possible to produce a revival effect in an optimal manner, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the number of transition games being played, an end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. This configuration prevents the carefully prepared end screen from going to waste. Furthermore, the player can view the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, and then be notified through a revival effect that the notification mode will continue. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction regarding the continuation of the notification mode. It is certainly possible to display the end screen and perform the revival effect after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. However, players typically play continuously, and in the notification mode, where virtual medals are stored and stored, the game interval is generally shorter because direct medal insertion is not required. Therefore, if the end screen is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, there is a risk that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen, which could lead to an incident where the player realizes from the revival effect that the previous game was the final game of the notification mode. This not only wastes the carefully prepared end screen, but also diminishes the satisfaction felt by players as the notification mode continues. On the other hand, the slot machine 10, which displays the end screen at the start of the final game, can effectively alleviate the above concerns.

The end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal section. This allows the player to play the first game in the normal section while still enjoying the excitement of the notification mode. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the end screen is displayed across two games, it is confirmed that the game is not in an advantageous section and that a revival effect will not be performed. This makes it possible to provide new gameplay features using the end screens that have been available for some time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration like the present slot machine 10 where a lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is not conducted during the normal period, there was a concern that players would prefer to play in the chance mode rather than the normal period and avoid playing on a slot machine in the normal period. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that if the end screen is displayed across two games, it is confirmed that the period is not advantageous and that a revival effect will not be performed. In this configuration, if a player who played in the notification mode sees the end screen in the final game of the notification mode, they will issue a command to start the next game in the hope of a revival effect. Therefore, if the advantageous period has ended, it is possible for the player who played in the notification mode to play the first game in the normal period. Even if the player ends their game at this time, the end screen will still be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, it is possible for other players other than the above player to start playing the second game in the normal period while hoping for a revival effect to be performed. This makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on slot machines 10 that are in the normal zone, and to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the slot machines 10.

The ending screen is displayed continuously until the game transitions from the normal mode to the chance mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects performed during the normal mode, thereby preventing an increase in memory capacity.

If you win a role when playing with three coins, you will transition from the normal mode to chance mode, with a loss occurring only with a probability of approximately 1 in 6.4. By configuring the game so that the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, it is possible to reduce the number of games spent in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the end screen being displayed continuously for an extended period of time, and it is also possible to reduce the chances that a player will end their game while the end screen is still displayed.

Even if the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, as described above, an event may occur in which the player remains in the normal zone without transitioning to chance mode. Furthermore, if the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is a concern that gameplay in the normal zone may become monotonous. Therefore, the slot machine 10 is configured to display a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel when the player does not transition from the normal zone to chance mode. This configuration makes it possible to encourage players to try to guess the setting based on the appearance of the suggestion jewel, or to encourage them to want the normal zone to continue until a fixed jewel is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on a slot machine 10 that is in the normal zone, and it is also possible to prevent gameplay in the normal zone from becoming monotonous.

When all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the displayed suggestive or fixed jewels are hidden. This configuration makes it possible to configure the suggestive or fixed jewels so that they cannot be seen without actually playing the game, allowing players who want to guess the setting to play in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in operation of the slot machine 10 due to the normal section.

From the sixth game onwards in the normal section, the slot machine 10 is configured to display a fixed jewel indicating the setting status. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play, even if the game does not transition from the normal section to chance mode. This is because if the player can understand the setting status through the fixed jewel, it becomes a major factor in deciding whether or not to continue playing.

When the game transitions to chance mode, the number of games played in chance mode is displayed. This configuration allows the player to understand the maximum number of games required before transitioning to notification mode and the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. However, since the number of games played in the normal zone is unrelated to the number of games played in the advantageous zone and chance mode, if the number of games were displayed after the end of the advantageous zone, for example, a game number that does not update until transitioning to chance mode, such as "-G," would have to be displayed. This could lead to the player perceiving play in the normal zone as meaningless and reducing their motivation to play. However, in a configuration like this slot machine 10 where the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal zone, the end screen can be switched to display the number of games played in chance mode, reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

When the end screen is displayed, it is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the current number of medals won. Furthermore, when the end screen continues to be displayed, i.e., when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the displayed number of medals won is not changed. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of medals won in the advantageous section, even when the end screen is displayed in the normal section. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the number of medals won displayed on the end screen, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

(Sixth embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, the probability of winning the push order bell was set so that the probability of winning the bell was the same when the left stop switch 42 was operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 was operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 was operated first. However, the probability of winning the push order bell may also be set so that the probability of winning the bell differs depending on which stop switch 42-44 is operated first. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 74 shows the symbol arrangement on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., number 19 on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., number 18 on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., number 17 on the left reel 32L), "White Star" (e.g., number 16 on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., number 15 on the left reel 32L), "Blue Star" (e.g., number 12 on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., number 11 on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., number 7 on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., number 6 on the left reel 32L), and "Red Star" (e.g., number 2 on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 74, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three parallel horizontal lines and two diagonally crossing lines, connecting the positions where these nine symbols are visible. More specifically, as shown in Figure 75(a), the horizontal combination lines are an upper line L1 connecting the upper row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a middle line L2 connecting the middle row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a lower line L3 connecting the lower row symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, diagonal combination lines include a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols on the right reel 32R, and a upward-sloping line L5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated combination line, i.e., an active line, a win is achieved, and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in Figure 75(b), only the upward-sloping line L5 is set as an active line. The four combined lines of the top line L1, middle line L2, bottom line L3, and downward-sloping line L4 are never set as active lines.

Figures 76 to 78 show the correspondence between the name of the condition device, the winning symbol combination, and the bonus awarded when a winning symbol is obtained.

BB is a conditional device that grants the bonus of transitioning to a gaming state when a winning combination is achieved.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a BB win occurs. When a BB win occurs, the game state transitions to BB state.

The conditional devices that grant the replay bonus when a winning combination is achieved include Replay 1 to Replay 11.

To explain some winning patterns, for example, if the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 1 win will occur. When a Replay 1 win is achieved, the "Replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will stop on the middle line L2.

If the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 7 win is awarded. If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and any of the "red 7," "BAR," "red star," and "blue star" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a Replay 8 win is awarded. When a Replay 8 win is achieved, the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the downward-sloping right line L4. In other words, in this embodiment, if the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any of the active line combinations, a Replay bonus is awarded, rather than a medal payout bonus.

Replay 9 is awarded when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line, or when the "White 7", "BAR", "Red Star", or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M and right reel 32R stop on an active line. Replay 10 is awarded when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White 7" or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. If the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a replay 11 win will be awarded. In this embodiment, the winning combinations that stop when replay 9 wins through replay 11 wins are considered chance combinations.

The conditional devices that grant the medal payout bonus when a winning combination is achieved are Small Win 1 to Small Win 32.

Minor win 1 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upper line L1 when a win is achieved. Minor win 2 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the downward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 3 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the middle line L2 when a win is achieved. Minor win 4 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the upward-sloping line L4 when a win is achieved. Minor win 5 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop on the lower line L3 when a win is achieved. Minor win 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a small mountain shape (bottom, middle, bottom) when a win is achieved. When minor win 1 through minor win 6 are achieved, eight medals are paid out.

Small wins 7 to 27, 31, and 32 function as compensation wins in this embodiment, and one medal will be paid out if a win is achieved.

Small wins 28 to 30 function as cherry wins in this embodiment, and three medals are paid out when a win is achieved.

Figure 79 shows the lottery table selected during a non-BB internal play when the BB winning flag of "Setting 3" is not carried over. The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning role and a point value PV. In addition to the correspondence between winning roles, index values IV, and point values PV, Figure 79 also lists the condition devices that make up the winning role, the winning role number of the winning flag that is set when the role lottery is won, and the group number, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the game can only be started with three coins, and when the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in Figure 79, the winning probability for each combination is as follows: The probability of winning the first replay is approximately 1 in 9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is approximately 1 in 94, the probability of winning the third replay is approximately 1 in 6,600, the probability of winning the first watermelon is approximately 1 in 160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is approximately 1 in 200, the probability of winning the first chance is approximately 1 in 410, the probability of winning the second chance is approximately 1 in 820, and the probability of winning the third chance is approximately 1 in 820. The probability of winning Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Left-Center-Right Bell 1, Left-Center-Right Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2, Right-Center-Left Bell 1, Right-Center-Left Bell 2 is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is approximately 1 in 16. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1 in 54, the probability of winning a strong bell is approximately 1 in 2,200, the probability of winning a single-piece role is approximately 1 in 260, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1 in 82, the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1 in 300, the probability of winning a double BB is approximately 1 in 4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. When not in the BB internal state, there will be no winning events during the internal replay, and there will also be no losing events where no winning combination occurs.

Although not shown in the figure, the lottery table selected during a BB while the BB win flag is carried over differs from the lottery table for non-BB internal periods in that the point value PV for internal replay (IV = 4) and the point value PV for single BB (IV = 32) are different. Specifically, the point value PV for internal replay is set to 4, and the point value PV for single BB is set to 0. Therefore, during a BB, there is a 1 in 16,000 probability of winning a duplicate replay, and a single BB will not be won. Because the winning probability for other roles is the same as during a non-BB internal period, no losses occur during a BB internal period.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the winning combination and the reel stopping results.

In this embodiment, the condition device for creating the winning combination and the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a combination other than a single BB is won, some kind of winning combination will always be achieved. For example, if the second watermelon is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Replay 7 or 8 will be achieved, and a replay bonus will be awarded. Similarly, if the strong cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either Small combination 28 to 30 will be achieved, and three medals will be paid out. In the event of a single BB win, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated at a time that allows the BB symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R, to stop on the active line L5, which is the upward-sloping right line, a BB win will be achieved. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated at any other time, a BB win will not be achieved and the BB win flag will be carried over.

Furthermore, if the main control device 101 wins BB and a small winning combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the small winning combination takes priority. If the main control device 101 wins BB and a replay combination, it sets and modifies the stop information so that the replay winning combination takes priority. Therefore, for example, if a duplicate BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the small winning combinations 7-27, 31, or 32 will be won, and one medal will be paid out. If the first replay is won while inside BB, regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, one of the replay combinations 1, 2, or 4 will be won, and a replay bonus will be awarded. The same applies if another combination is won while inside BB; regardless of the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44, a winning combination for a condition device other than BB will be won, and the corresponding bonus will be awarded. As mentioned above, since no losses occur within the BB, in this embodiment, a BB win cannot be achieved in any game other than the one in which a single BB was won. In other words, in the first embodiment, a BB win was avoided by playing two coins to enter the BB2 state and then playing three coins, but in this embodiment, a BB win can be avoided without following the above procedure.

If you win on Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, operating the left stop switch 42, then the centre stop switch 43, and then the right stop switch 44 will result in a win for minor win 1, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for minor win 7, 10, 15, or 18, resulting in the payout of one medal. The same is true for winning on Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2, Right-Left-Centre Bell 1, Right-Centre-Left Bell 2. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order corresponding to the winning combination will result in a win for the winning condition device among minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of eight medals. Operating the stop switches 42-44 in any other order will result in a win for any winning condition device other than minor wins 1-6, resulting in the payout of one medal. If the first special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in this order will result in minor win 3 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the second special bell is won, operating the middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 4 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 14, or 27 and one medal being paid out. If the third special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 in this order will result in minor win 5 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. If the fourth special bell is won, operating the right stop switch 44 → center stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 in this order will result in minor win 6 and eight medals being paid out, while operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in any other order will result in any of minor wins 7 to 10 or 23 to 27 and one medal being paid out. In the following, left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, left-center-left Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, right-center-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, and the 1st to 4th special bells are collectively referred to as "push order roles" or "push order bells." In addition, minor roles 1 to 6 are achieved when the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in any combination line or small hill shape. For this reason, in the following, minor roles 1 to 6 are collectively referred to as "bell roles."

The following explains the game zones in this embodiment.

The game zone in this embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that it consists of two types of game zones, the normal zone and the advantageous zone, and that the advantageous zone consists of two types of game modes, the chance mode and the notification mode (see Figure 24). However, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it can only be played with three coins, that the notification mode ends based on the number of games played in the notification mode rather than the net increase in coins, and that the navigation rate, which notifies the player of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win if the push order bell is hit in the notification mode, can change. Therefore, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 when managing the game zone will be explained below with reference to the flowcharts from Figure 80 onwards. To make it easier to understand, the various processes performed by the main control unit 101 in each game zone will be explained individually.

First, we will explain the processing during normal intervals.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process for the normal section. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5301, it is determined whether a win flag has been set in the win flag storage area 106a, i.e., whether any role has been won. If the win flag has been set, proceed to step S5302, where it is determined whether the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the win role numbers 1 to 31 (see Figure 79) is stored in the win flag storage area 106a. If the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has been won, a transition flag is set in step S5303, and the interval indicator 66 is turned ON in step S5304, and this processing ends. If the win flag is not set, or if the win flag indicates that a small role or replay has not been won, i.e., if a single BB has been won, this processing ends immediately.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in the normal interval. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery for this game has been won. In this case, the advantageous zone transition process shown in steps S5402 to S5410 is performed.

In the advantageous zone transition process, step S5402 determines whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, i.e., whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, proceed to step S5403, where the transition flag is cleared. In step S5404, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S5405, the zone game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S5406, the game mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S5407, the transition game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 700. In step S5408, the mode game number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S5409, the difference number counter provided in the zone information storage area 106d is set to 0. Then, in step S5410, an interval command is sent, and this process ends. Here, an interval command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp various information related to the play interval at the time the game ends (i.e., the play interval and play mode of the next game, and if it is an advantageous interval, the number of plays played in that advantageous interval and the number of plays played in that play mode, etc.), and in step S5410, an interval command corresponding to the play interval flag, play mode flag, and various counter values set in the interval information storage area 106d is sent.

If it is determined in step S5402 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the transition flag is cleared in step S5411. Then, in step S5410, a section command is sent and this processing ends. In other words, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section, even if the transition lottery result is won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to chance mode.

If it is determined in step S5401 that the transition flag is not set, a section command is sent in step S5410, and this processing ends.

As described above, if a role other than a single BB is won during the normal period, the game will transition to the chance mode of the advantageous period. As shown in Figure 79, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first during the normal period, the game will end in almost one game. Also, if the BB is in progress, a role other than a single BB will always be won, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal period will end in one game.

Next, we will explain the processing in chance mode during advantageous zones.

Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5501, it is determined whether a rare role has been won. In this embodiment, the first watermelon, second watermelon, first chance, second chance, third chance, strong bell, weak cherry, and strong cherry are set as rare roles. Therefore, in step S5501, it is determined whether any of the winning role numbers 5 to 9, 27, 29, and 30 (see Figure 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If a rare role has been won, the process proceeds to step S5502, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role has been won or not. In step S5503, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the transition flag is set in step S5504 and the process is terminated. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process is terminated without setting the transition flag. If a rare combination is not won, the process will end without performing the transition lottery described above.

Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the game interval processing in chance mode. The game interval processing is performed after the medal payout processing is completed (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S5601, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S5602, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process was performed in the termination determination process of step S5601, and after sending a zone command in step S5611, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S5603, where it is determined whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time. If the left stop switch 42 has been operated for the first time, in step S5604, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S5605, it is determined whether the transition flag has been set. If the transition flag is set, this means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won, so in step S5606, the transition flag is cleared, and in step S5608, the play mode flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A. In the following step S5609, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S5611, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S5605 that the transition flag is not set, this means that the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5607, where it is determined whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter does not match the value of the transition game count counter, an interval command is sent in step S5611, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag A in step S5608. In the following step S5609, the transition game count counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, the mode game count counter is set to 0. Thereafter, an interval command is sent in step S5611, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S5603 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first, rather than the left stop switch 42, the transition flag is cleared in step S5612, a section command is sent in step S5611, and this processing ends.

As described above, from chance mode, the game transitions to notification mode A if the left stop switch 42 is operated first to play, if the transition lottery is won, or if the number of games played corresponds to the value of the transition game count counter. If the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first to play, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated and the game does not transition to notification mode A. Furthermore, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first to play, the value of the mode game count counter is not updated, so the game does not transition to notification mode A even if the number of games played corresponds to the value of the transition game count counter.

Next, we will explain the processing in the advantageous zone notification mode.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S5701, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, proceed to step S5702, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, proceed to step S5703, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game count counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set win flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. In the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, there is approximately a 1 in 8 chance of winning either 10, 30, or 50 additional games. In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has been won, the additional flag is set in step S5705, and an additional command is sent in step S5706. Here, the additional command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the additional lottery and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game count counter. In step S5707, a value corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. Then, this process ends. If the bonus lottery is not won, this process ends without setting the bonus flag. If a rare combination is not won, this process ends without performing the bonus lottery.

If it is determined in step S5701 that the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S5708, where a navigation determination process is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. The navigation determination process determines whether or not to perform navigation based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85, if any of the following has been won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, or right-left-center bell 2, it is determined that navigation will be performed 33% of the time if the notification mode is A. More specifically, since there are 1,980 random number values that result in a win for each of the above roles (see FIG. 79), 660 random number values are set as random number values that are determined to be navigational, and the remaining 1,320 random number values are set as random number values that are determined to be non-navigable. If any of the first, second, third, or fourth special bells is won, navigation is determined to occur 100% in notification mode A. In step S5709, it is determined whether or not to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. If navigation is to occur, a navigation flag is set in step S5710, and processing ends. If navigation is not to occur, a prediction flag is set in step S5711, a prediction command is sent in step S5711, and processing ends. Here, the prediction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the user that navigation will not occur for the operation sequence that will result in a bell win.

As described above, in notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in the bell winning may or may not be navigated. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the main control unit 101 and display control unit 81 when actually navigating the operation sequence.

The main control device 101 performs processing to display on the instruction monitor the operation sequence that can result in a bell win during the rotation start processing (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display processing (see FIG. 19). In the first embodiment, the instruction monitor was displayed after determining whether or not the push order bell was won (S603, S802). However, in this embodiment, the instruction monitor is displayed after determining whether or not the navigation flag is set, rather than whether or not the push order bell was won, and the instruction monitor is displayed if the navigation flag is set.

Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the winning role information creation process. The winning role information creation process is a process for creating winning role information that indicates the result of the role judgment from the various information that makes up the lottery result command. The winning role information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is sent (see Figure 12).

In step S5801, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S5802, and this process ends. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S5803, and it is determined whether the navigation flag has been set. If the navigation flag has been set, this means that the current game mode is the notification mode, and it has been decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In this case, the winning role number is set as winning role information in step S5802, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, this means that the current game mode is a normal interval or chance mode, or that the current game mode is an announcement mode but a decision has been made not to navigate the operation sequence that can result in a bell win. In such a case, a group number is set as winning role information in step S5804, and this processing ends. Specifically, if any of the following is won: left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, group number "1" is set as winning role information. If any of the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, or fourth special bell is won, group number "2" is set as winning role information. When a group number is set, the winning role number is not set as winning role information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can determine that one of the push order bells corresponding to the group number has been selected, but it cannot determine which push order bell has been selected. Note that hereinafter, left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, and right-left-center bell 2 are collectively referred to as "push order group 1." Additionally, the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell are collectively referred to as "push order group 2."

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the operation navigation process performed by the display control device 81. The operation navigation process is initiated when a lottery result command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S5901, it is determined whether a winning combination number has been received. If a winning combination number has been received, in step S5903 it is determined whether the winning combination is a push order bell, and if it is not a push order bell, this process ends. If a winning combination number indicating that the winning combination is a push order bell has been received, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to navigate the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. In such a case, in step S5903, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S5901 that a winning combination number has not been received, this means that a group number has been received. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5904, where it is determined whether a prediction command has been received. If a prediction command has not been received, this means that the current play area is the normal area or chance mode, and the process ends. If a prediction command has been received, the process displays "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S5905, and the process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display unit 65, it is possible to notify the player that the push order bell has been won, although it does not guide the player to the operation sequence that will result in a bell win. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of "???" functions as a promotion suggestion that will increase the navigation rate in subsequent games.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game session in which a simulated game is played, the above operation sequence and "???" will be displayed when the simulated game ends and the actual game begins.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the promotion determination process performed by the main control device 101. The promotion determination process is performed after the reel control process (S212, see Figure 11) has ended, i.e., after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In step S6001, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated. If the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined whether the navigation flag is set in step S6002. If the navigation flag is set, it is cleared in step S6003 and then the processing proceeds to step S6004; if the navigation flag is not set, the processing proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether the prediction flag is set, and if the prediction flag is not set, the processing is terminated.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S6005, and a determination is made in step S6006 as to whether a bell win has occurred. If a bell win has not occurred, this process ends. If a bell win has occurred, a promotion lottery is held in step S6007 to determine whether or not to increase the navigation rate. The promotion lottery is held based on the set game mode flag, the set win flag, and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the winning combination has been achieved. In step S6008, a determination is made as to whether or not the promotion lottery has been won. If the promotion lottery has been won, this process ends. If the promotion lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6009, where a determination is made as to whether or not the set game mode flag is notification flag A. If notification flag A is set, the process proceeds to step S6010, where the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag B, in subsequent game plays, as shown in Figure 85, if push order group 1 is selected, navigation will be determined to occur with a 66% probability, and if push order group 2 is selected, navigation will be determined to occur with a 100% probability.

If it is determined in step S6009 that notification flag A is not set, the process proceeds to step S6011, where the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag C, in subsequent game plays, if the push order bell is selected, navigation will be determined to occur 100% of the time, as shown in Figure 85.

If the game mode flag is changed in step S6010 or step S6011, a promotion command is sent in step S6012, and this processing ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the player that they have won the promotion lottery. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes an effect suggesting that they have won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, in notification mode A, a daytime image is displayed as the background image, in notification mode B, an evening image is displayed as the background image, and in notification mode C, a nighttime image is displayed as the background image. When the display control device 81 receives a promotion command, it executes processing to switch to the background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game onwards.

Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S6102, it is determined whether the current gaming zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current gaming zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S6101, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S6108.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S6103 adds 1 to the value of the mode game number counter, and step S6104 determines whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, step S6108 sends an interval command and then terminates this processing.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous zone end processing shown in steps S6105 to S6107 is performed, and an zone command is sent in step S6108, terminating this processing. In the advantageous zone end processing, the game zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S6105, and the zone indicator 66 is turned OFF in step S6106. In step S6107, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous zone. In the initialization processing, processing is performed to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game number counter value, etc.).

Here, we will explain the playability of this slot machine 10.

The probability of winning Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1, Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, Middle-Left-Right Bell 1, Middle-Left-Right Bell 2, Middle-Right-Left Bell 1, Middle-Right-Left Bell 2, Right-Centre-Left Bell 1, Right-Centre ... which form Push Order Group 1, is approximately 1 in 33. The probability of winning the 1st Special Bell, 2nd Special Bell, 3rd Special Bell, and 4th Special Bell, which form Push Order Group 2, is approximately 1 in 16.

When the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a reference, the probability of achieving a bell win based on the push order bell win is as follows. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are left-center-right bell 1 and left-center-right bell 2, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 17. When stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the center-left-right operation order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, and the first special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the center-right-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, and the second special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-left-center operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, and the third special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1. When stop switches 42-44 are operated in the right-center-left operating order, the winning combinations that result in a bell win are right-center-left bell 1, right-center-left bell 2, and the fourth special bell, so the probability of a bell win is approximately 1 in 8.1.

As described above, when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right-center order, i.e., when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of a bell winning is lower than when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first. As a result, the expected number of medals paid out per game in the normal section and chance mode is approximately 1.9 medals when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right-center order, and approximately 2.3 medals when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other order.

In this configuration, when considering only the expected medal payout per game, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first. However, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal zone, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, and the game does not transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, and the game does not transition from the chance mode to the notification mode. In addition, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the chance mode, the mode game number counter, which triggers a transition to the notification mode, is not updated, while the zone game number counter, which triggers a transition to the normal zone, is updated. Therefore, when considering the transition between game zones, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first. Therefore, the following describes the gameplay when the left stop switch 42 is operated first.

In the normal zone, if you win a role other than a single BB, you will move to chance mode in the advantageous zone. As shown in Figure 79, for example, in "Setting 3," the probability of winning a single BB while not inside a BB is approximately 1 in 16,000. Therefore, the normal zone will end in almost one game. Also, if you are inside a BB, you will always win a role other than a single BB, so the normal zone will end in one game.

When the game transitions from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the game starts in chance mode and the transition game count is set to 700 (see Figure 81).

In chance mode, if a rare combination is won, a lottery is held to transition to notification mode. If the transition lottery is won, the game will transition from chance mode to notification mode. Also, even if the transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to notification mode if 700 plays have been played in chance mode (see Figure 83).

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, the transition game number counter is set to 100 (see Figure 83). Therefore, when transitioning to notification mode, 100 plays can be played in that notification mode. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter (see Figure 84). Then, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the notification mode and advantageous zone end, and a transition to the normal zone occurs (see Figure 89).

The notification mode starts from notification mode A. In notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 33% probability is announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability is announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode A is approximately 4.4 medals, and in notification mode A, an increase of approximately 1.4 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode A but the operation order is not announced, the auxiliary display unit 65 will display "???" to notify that the push order bell has been won (hereinafter referred to as the "promotion effect"). If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. Then, if the promotion lottery is won, the system will transition from notification mode A to notification mode B (see Figure 88).

In notification mode B, if the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 66% probability will be announced for push order group 1, and the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability will be announced for push order group 2 (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in notification mode B is approximately 5.1 medals, and in notification mode B, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.1 medals per game.

If the push order bell is won in notification mode B but the operation order is not announced, a promotion effect will be performed in the same way as in notification mode A. If a bell win is achieved in that play, a promotion lottery will be held. If the promotion lottery is won, the game will transition from notification mode B to notification mode C (see Figure 88).

In Notification Mode C, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the operation sequence that will result in a bell win with a 100% probability (see Figure 85). As a result, the expected medal payout per game in Notification Mode C is approximately 5.8 medals, and in Notification Mode C, you can expect to receive an increase of approximately 2.8 medals per game.

As mentioned above, in notification mode, the expected number of medals paid out per game changes depending on whether the player is in notification mode A, B, or C. For this reason, players hoping to win more medals should aim to win rare combinations to increase the number of games played when switching to notification mode, while also achieving a bell win in a game with a promotion effect.

As mentioned above, the probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using the left-center-right or left-right-center operation sequence is lower than the probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using other operation sequences. Therefore, in games with promotion effects, it is possible that the probability of achieving a bell win is higher if the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in Figure 79, in push-order group 1, the same point value PV is set for each of the six operation sequences, so the winning probability for each operation sequence is equal. The reason for the lower probability of winning a push-order bell that can achieve a bell win using the left-center-right or left-right-center operation sequence is due to push-order group 2, which can achieve a bell win using other operation sequences. Furthermore, in notification mode A and notification mode B, if push-order group 2 is selected, the operation sequence that can achieve a bell win with a 100% probability is announced. Therefore, in games with promotion effects, the probability of achieving a bell win is equal regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating left-center-right or left-center-center is lower than the probability of winning a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating other push-orders. This configuration makes it possible to vary the probability of achieving a bell win depending on the order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, in a configuration in which the probability of winning a bell varies depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated, there is a concern that disparities in profits may arise among players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10. In a situation in which the operation order is not announced, a player who knows this fact is likely to operate the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 first, while a player who does not know this fact is likely to operate the left stop switch 42 first, resulting in differences in the probability of winning a bell.

In this slot machine 10, in notification mode A and notification mode B, when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the center left/right, center right/left, right/left center, or right/center left operation sequence is won, the operation sequence is announced more frequently than when a push-order bell that can be achieved by operating the left/center right or left/right/center operation sequence is won. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the difference in the probability of winning the former push-order bell and the latter push-order bell when the operation sequence is not announced, thereby reducing the difference in the frequency of bell wins. As a result, it is possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, allowing players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In Notification Mode A and Notification Mode B, when the push order bell is won, the system determines whether or not to notify the operation order so that the frequency of bell wins does not differ depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified. This configuration makes it possible to avoid disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, allowing players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

In addition to the center, left, and right bells, a first special bell has been provided as a winning combination that can result in a bell win when the center, left, and right operation sequence is selected. Similarly, a second special bell has been provided in addition to the center, right, and left bells, a third special bell has been provided in addition to the right, left, and center bells, and a fourth special bell has been provided in addition to the right, center, and left bells. This configuration makes it possible to vary the frequency of bell wins when the left stop switch 42 is operated first and when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, depending on the probability of winning the first to fourth special bells. As a result, it is relatively easy to realize a configuration in which the frequency of bell wins varies depending on the operation sequence.

Of the push order bells, push order group 1 is formed by left-center-right bell 1, left-center-right bell 2, left-center-left bell 1, left-center-left bell 2, center-left-right bell 1, center-left-right bell 2, center-right-left bell 1, center-right-left bell 2, right-left-center bell 1, right-left-center bell 2, right-center-left bell 1, and right-center-left bell 2. Push order group 2 is formed by the first special bell that can achieve a bell win with the center-left operation sequence, the second special bell that can achieve a bell win with the center-right-left operation sequence, the third special bell that can achieve a bell win with the right-left-center operation sequence, and the fourth special bell that can achieve a bell win with the right-center-left operation sequence. In the notification mode, the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation order differs between when push order group 1 is selected and when push order group 2 is selected. This configuration enables control according to the group when determining whether to notify the operation order in the notification mode. As a result, when the push order bell is selected, it is possible to realize a notification mode with a relatively simple configuration, in which the operation order is either notified or not announced.

It is certainly possible to provide six types of push-order bells: left-center-right bell, left-center-right bell, center-left-right bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-left-center bell, and right-center-left bell. The winning probability for the left-center-right bell and left-center-right bell is lower than that for the center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-left-center bell, and right-center-left bell. This allows the navigation determination process to be performed so that the probability of winning a bell is equal regardless of the operation order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated when the operation order is not notified. However, with such a configuration, the lower limit of the navigation rate is restricted by the point values PV of the left-center-right bell and left-center-left bell. A detailed example will be explained in (78) below. Taking the point values in Group 1 in Figure 79 as an example, the upper limit of the value number for determining that navigation will not be performed is set to 3960 (= 1980 x 2). Therefore, in the above configuration, it is necessary to set the actual navigation rate and point value PV after taking into consideration both the desired navigation rate and the winning probability of each of the above roles, and there is a concern that trial and error could result in a significant amount of development time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, which controls according to group when deciding whether to notify the operation order, if the winning probability of each winning role belonging to group 1 is configured to be equal or nearly equal, the navigation rate can be set as desired. This makes it possible to effectively resolve the above concern, and it becomes possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a notification mode in which the operation order is not announced when the push order bell is won, or in which the operation order is not announced.

In the notification mode, if push order group 1 is selected, the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability, and if push order group 2 is selected, the operation order is always notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, while also providing notification modes in which the operation order is not notified when the push order bell is selected, and in which the operation order is not notified.

The winning probability for winning roles belonging to push order group 1 is now equal. This configuration makes it possible to attribute the increased probability of winning push order bells, which can be achieved by operating in the following order: center left/right, center right/left, right left/center, and right center left, to push order group 2. Furthermore, by configuring the system to always notify the operating order when push order group 2 is selected, it is possible to achieve the same probability of achieving a bell win regardless of the operating order in which stop switches 42-44 are operated when the operating order is not notified in notification mode.

In notification modes A, B, and C, which have different navigation rates, the navigation rate differs when pressing group 1 is selected, but the navigation rate is the same when pressing group 2 is selected. This configuration makes it possible to change the navigation rate while avoiding disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10.

If the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, a promotion effect will be displayed. This configuration allows players to play while anticipating a transition to notification mode B or notification mode C, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The configuration is such that a promotion lottery is held if a bell win occurs during a game in which a promotion effect is performed. With this configuration, the frequency of the promotion lottery, and therefore the probability of winning the promotion lottery, will differ between players who know that the frequency of bell wins varies depending on the operation order and players who are unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter players losing their motivation to play. However, with this slot machine 10, the probability of a bell win is the same regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

In the normal zone, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the game will not move to the advantageous zone, and in the chance mode, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the game will not move to the notification mode. This configuration encourages the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first, while also making it possible to differentiate between the increase and decrease of medals in notification mode and when not in notification mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the game's enjoyment.

When the main control device 101 sends a lottery result command in a situation where the push order bell has been won, if the operation order is to be notified, it sends the winning role number as the winning role information, and if the operation order is not to be notified, it sends the group number as the winning role information. If the operation order is not to be notified in a situation where the push order bell has been won, it is possible to configure the display control device 81 so that it does not know which push order bell has been won. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to obtain winning roles from the display control device 81.

Press order group 2 is formed by the first special bell, which can be achieved by operating the center, left, and right buttons in a bell winning sequence; the second special bell, which can be achieved by operating the center, right, and left buttons in a bell winning sequence; the third special bell, which can be achieved by operating the right, left, and center buttons in a bell winning sequence; and the fourth special bell, which can be achieved by operating the right, center, and left buttons in a bell winning sequence. This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to obtain winning combinations from the display control device 81. For example, even if only the first special bell is set as press order group 2 and the point value PV of the first special bell is set to 16,720 (= 4,180 x 2), as in this slot machine 10, it is possible to differentiate the frequency of bell winning when the left stop switch 42 is operated first from the frequency of bell winning when the center stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, while maintaining the same frequency of bell winning when the operation sequence is not announced in the announcement mode. However, in this configuration, push order group 2 and winning the first special bell are uniquely associated, so even if the group number rather than the winning combination number is sent to the display control device 81, a fraudster would be able to detect that the first special bell has been won. On the other hand, in this embodiment, where push order group 2 is formed from four types of special bells, it is not possible to know which special bell has been won, making it possible to reduce the frequency with which fraudsters achieve bell wins. Furthermore, by configuring the first through fourth special bells to have equal winning probabilities, it is also possible to reduce the frequency with which fraudsters achieve bell wins.

(Seventh embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, if the player wins the additional lottery in the notification mode, the player is notified that the additional lottery has been won in that game. However, the configuration may also be such that the player is notified that the additional lottery has been won after a predetermined continuous effect or premonition effect is executed across multiple games. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that the basic configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so only the differences will be explained below.

Figure 91 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S6201, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S6202, where it is determined whether the competition flag, described below, is set. If the competition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S6203, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S6204, where a transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to notification mode. In the transition lottery for chance mode, a win/loss determination is made based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been successful. In step S6205, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has not been won, the process ends as is. If the transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6206, where a lottery is held to determine the number of competition games. In the lottery for the number of competition games, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether the combination has been successful. In step S6207, the transition game number counter is set to the value obtained in the competition game number lottery, and in step S6208, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S6209, the competition flag is set. Then, in step S6210, a competition command is sent, and this processing ends. Here, the competition command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to execute a competition presentation, and in step S6210, information including the competition game number obtained in the competition game number lottery is sent.

If the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, this process ends without conducting the transition lottery. Also, if it is determined in step S6202 that the showdown flag is set, this means that the lottery for the number of showdown games has already been conducted, meaning that the transition lottery has already been won, so this process ends.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in chance mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S6301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed (see Figure 29).

In step S6302, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone but a normal zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S6301, and after sending a zone command in step S6310, this process is terminated.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, proceed to step S6303, where it is determined whether the current play is a three-coin play. If it is a three-coin play, in step S6304, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter, and in step S6305, it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, an interval command is sent in step S6310, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the showdown flag is cleared in step S6306, and the play mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S6307. In the following step S6308, the transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S6309, the mode game number counter is set to 0. Thereafter, in step S6310, an interval command is sent, and this processing ends.

If step S6303 determines that the current game is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, a section command is sent in step S6310 without updating the mode game number counter, and this processing ends.

As described above, if the transition lottery is won in chance mode, the game will transition to notification mode after three-coin plays have been played the number of times (3 to 5) obtained in the match game number lottery. Note that if the transition lottery is not won in chance mode, the transition game number counter is set to 700 when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (S1406, see Figure 26), and the game will transition to notification mode after 700 three-coin plays have been played.

In this embodiment, if the transition lottery is won in chance mode, a battle effect is performed for the number of three-coin games obtained in the battle game number lottery (hereinafter also referred to as the "battle game number"). The battle effect is an effect in which a predetermined battle pits the main character of the slot machine 10 against an enemy character, and if the main character wins, an announcement is made that a special benefit, such as a transition to the announcement mode, will be granted. The following describes the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the battle effect in chance mode.

Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the competition command processing in chance mode. The competition command processing is initiated when a competition command sent from the main control device 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game.

In step S6401, it is determined whether the defeat flag, described below, has been set. If the defeat flag has been set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6402 and the process proceeds to step S6403. If the defeat flag has not been set, the process proceeds directly to step S6403. In step S6403, a victory flag is set. In step S6404, the number of battle games indicated by the battle command is set in the announcement game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S6405, the effect game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. This process then terminates.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in chance mode. Lottery result command processing is initiated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control unit 101 is received, and is initiated at the start of the game. In a game round in which both a competition command and a lottery result command are received, the competition command is received before the lottery result command is received, and so lottery result command processing is initiated after the competition command processing is completed.

In step S6501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game, and if it is a two-coin game rather than a three-coin game, the process ends. If it is a three-coin game, it is determined in step S6502 whether the win flag is set. If the win flag is set, this means that a showdown command has been received, so the showdown presentation process is performed in step S6503 and the process ends.

In the showdown effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, in step S6601, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announced game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announced game number counter, processing proceeds to step S6603, where a corresponding effect is initiated according to the value of the effect game number counter, and processing ends. The ROM of the display control device 81 pre-stores showdown effect start video data for the first game, showdown effect mid-game video data for games two and beyond when no winner is decided, victory video data in which the main character wins, and defeat video data in which the main character is defeated. In step S6603, if the value of the effect game number counter is 1, control is initiated to output the showdown effect start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65. If the value of the effect game number counter is 2 to 4, control is initiated to output the showdown effect mid-game video data to the auxiliary display unit 65. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6604, where it determines whether the victory flag is set. If the victory flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6605, where control is initiated to output victory effect video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, and the victory effect begins. Then, in step S6606, the victory flag is cleared, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result command processing, if it is determined in step S6502 that the win flag is not set, it is determined in step S6504 whether the defeat flag is set. If the defeat flag is not set, the effect determination process is performed in step S6505, and this processing ends.

In the effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 96, in step S6701, it is determined whether or not a rare role has been won. If a rare role has not been won, this process is terminated. If a rare role has been won, in step S6702, a showdown effect lottery is held to determine whether or not a showdown effect will be executed. In the showdown effect lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the winning role and a random number obtained by the display control device 81. In step S6703, it is determined whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won. If the showdown effect lottery has not been won, this process is terminated. If the showdown effect lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6704, where a lottery for the number of showdown games is held. In the showdown game number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the winning role and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. In step S6705, the value obtained in the showdown game number lottery is set to the announcement game number counter, and in step S6706, the effect game number counter is set to 0. In step S6707, a defeat flag is set. Then, in step S6708, the above-described competition presentation process is performed, and this process ends. In the competition presentation process in step S6708, the value of the presentation game number counter is updated to 1, and control is performed to output competition presentation start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65.

As described above, the display control device 81 independently determines whether to execute a showdown effect when the win flag is not set, i.e., when the player has not won the lottery to transition to the notification mode. If it decides to execute a showdown effect, it sets the defeat flag.

If the defeat flag is set, the lottery result command processing makes a positive determination in step S6504 and performs showdown presentation processing in step S6503, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 94.

In the showdown effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, in step S6601, 1 is added to the value of the effect game number counter. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6603, where a corresponding effect is initiated according to the value of the effect game number counter, and this processing ends. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the effect game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter, the process proceeds to step S6604, where it is determined whether a win flag has been set. If a defeat flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S6607, where control is initiated to output defeat effect video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, and a defeat effect is initiated. Thereafter, in step S6608, the defeat flag is cleared, and this processing ends.

If a competition command is received while the defeat flag is set, i.e., if the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is won during the defeat competition presentation, the competition command processing shown in FIG. 93 is initiated. In the competition command processing, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6402, and the victory flag is set in step S6403. Then, in step S6404, the number of competition games indicated by the competition command is set in the announcement game number counter, and in step S6405, the presentation game number counter is set to 0. As a result, the defeat competition presentation on the auxiliary display unit 65 ends midway, and the victory competition presentation is restarted from the beginning.

Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in notification mode. The section lottery process is performed after the winning/losing hand has been determined in the lottery process (step S309, see Figure 12), and is performed at the start of the game.

In step S6801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-coin game. If it is a three-coin game, the process proceeds to step S6802, where it is determined whether a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S6803, where an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the result is determined based on the win flag that has been set and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the combination has been won. Incidentally, in the additional lottery, for example, in a setting of 3, if a watermelon is won, there is approximately a one-in-five probability that the additional number of games will be won, with either 30, 50, 100, or 300, and if a cherry is won, there is approximately a one-in-three probability that the additional number of games will be won, with either 10, 20, 30, or 50. In step S6804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery has not been won, it is determined in step S6805 whether or not the effect flag has been set. If the effect flag is not set, the first effect determination process is performed in step S6806, and then this process ends.

In the first effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, a showdown effect lottery is held in step S6901 to determine whether or not to execute a showdown effect. In the showdown effect lottery, a win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the role is a win or loss. In step S6902, it is determined whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won. If the showdown effect lottery has not been won, this process is terminated as is. If the showdown effect lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S6903, where a lottery for the number of showdown games is held. In this showdown game number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role is a win or loss, just as in the chance mode. In step S6904, the value obtained in the showdown game number lottery is set in the showdown game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S6905, it is determined whether the number of games missing is greater than 0. More specifically, the value obtained by adding 1 to the mode game number counter is subtracted from the value of the transition game number counter to derive the number of remaining games in the notification mode. The reason for subtracting the value obtained by adding 1 to the mode game number counter is that the mode game number counter is updated during the game section processing after the game ends, and therefore the mode game number counter is not updated during the section lottery processing. Once the number of remaining games in the notification mode has been derived, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is subtracted from the value obtained by the competition game number lottery to derive the number of missing games. Therefore, if the number of missing games is greater than 0, this means that if the competition presentation is performed as is, the notification mode will end midway through the competition presentation. In such a case, the number of missing games is added to the value of the transition game number counter in step S6906, and the process proceeds to step S6907. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, this means that the competition presentation can be performed to the end in the notification mode, and the process proceeds to step S6907 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S6907, a presentation flag is set in the interval information storage area 106d. Then, in step S6908, a competition command is sent, and this process ends. In notification mode, the competition command sends information including the number of competition games obtained in the competition game number lottery and the number of additional games obtained in the additional lottery. Note that since the first presentation determination process is performed when the additional lottery is not won, in step S6908, information including a value between 3 and 5 as the number of competition games and 0 as the number of additional games is sent.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if it is determined in step S6805 that the effect flag is set, this means that the showdown effect is being executed, and so this process ends without performing the first effect determination process.

If it is determined in step S6804 that the additional lottery has been won, the second presentation determination process is performed to determine the method for announcing the number of additional games, and then this process is terminated.

In the second effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 99, step S7001 determines whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, step S7002 executes a showdown effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute a showdown effect. Step S7003 determines whether or not the showdown effect lottery has been won.

If the match presentation lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S7004, where a match presentation number lottery is conducted. In this match presentation number lottery, a value between 3 and 5 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is successful, just as in the first presentation determination process. Furthermore, the same lottery table is used to determine the match presentation number in the chance mode, the first presentation determination process, and the second presentation determination process. In step S7005, the value obtained in the match presentation number lottery is set in the match presentation number counter. In step S7006, it is determined whether the number of games in short supply is greater than 0. If the number of games in short supply is greater than 0, this means that if the match presentation is conducted as is, some of the additional games will be consumed under the match presentation. Therefore, in such a case, in step S7007, the number of games in short supply is added to the value of the transition game number counter, and the process proceeds to step S7008. On the other hand, if the number of games insufficient is 0 or less, this means that the showdown effect can be executed to the end without consuming part of the additional games, so the process proceeds to step S7008 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S7008, a display flag is set in the interval information storage area 106d, and in step S7009, a showdown command is sent. Since the second display determination process is performed when the additional game lottery is won, in step S7009, information including a value between 3 and 5 as the number of showdown games and a value of 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300 as the number of additional games is sent. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the additional game lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This process then terminates.

If it is determined in step S7003 that the player has not won the showdown effect lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S7011 and an add-on command is sent in step S7012 in order to execute the pseudo-game described in the first embodiment above. Then, in step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the add-on lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then terminates.

If it is determined in step S7001 that the effect flag is set, this means that a competition effect is being executed, and so a competition command is sent in step S7013. At this time, since the additional lottery has been won but the competition game number lottery has not been held, information including 0 as the number of competition games and one of the following values as the number of additional games: 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300 is sent. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This processing then terminates.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if the current game involves two coins instead of three, or if a rare combination is not won, the process will end without performing the first effect determination process and the second effect determination process.

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game determination process.

In the pseudo-game determination process, step S7101 determines whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process ends. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S7102, where it determines whether the bonus flag is set. If the bonus flag is set, the bonus flag is cleared in step S7103, and the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and the process ends. If the bonus flag is not set, it determines whether the effect flag is set in step S7105. If the effect flag is set, this means that a showdown effect is being executed, and the process ends. If the effect flag is not set, a pseudo-game lottery is held in step S7106 to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game. In the pseudo-game lottery, the win/loss determination is made based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining whether or not the role is a win. In step S7107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, this processing ends. If the pseudo-game lottery has been won, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S7104, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, no pseudo-games will be played during the competition presentation.

Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the game section processing in notification mode. The game section processing is performed after the medal payout process has ended (step S214, see Figure 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S7201, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment above is performed, and in step S7202, it is determined whether the current play zone is a favorable zone. If it is determined that the current play zone is a normal zone and not a favorable zone, this means that the favorable zone termination process has been performed in the termination determination process of step S7201, and then the process is terminated after sending a zone command in step S7208.

If the current play zone is a favorable zone, step S7203 adds 1 to the value of the mode game count counter, and step S7204 determines whether the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter. If the value of the mode game count counter matches the value of the transition game count counter, steps S7205 to S7207 are performed to end the favorable zone, and an zone command is sent in step S7208, terminating this processing. In the favorable zone end processing, step S7205 changes the play zone flag stored in the zone information storage area 106d to a normal flag, and step S7206 turns off the zone indicator 66. In step S7207, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the favorable zone. The initialization processing includes processing to initialize information related to the instruction function stored in the zone information storage area 106d (for example, the zone game count counter value, etc.), and processing to clear the effect flag if it is set.

If it is determined in step S7204 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the value of the battle game number counter is decremented by 1 in step S7209, and it is determined in step S7210 whether the value of the battle game number counter has reached 0. If the value of the battle game number counter has reached 0, this means that the battle presentation has ended, so the presentation flag is cleared in step S7211. If the presentation flag has been cleared, or if it is determined in step S7210 that the value of the battle game number counter has not reached 0, an interval command is sent in step S7208, and this processing ends.

Next, we will explain the various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing a showdown effect in the notification mode. As explained in the section lottery process in the notification mode, in the notification mode, whether a victory showdown effect or a defeat showdown effect is being executed, the main control device 101 determines whether or not to execute the showdown effect and sends a showdown command.

Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the competition command processing in notification mode.

In step S7301, it is determined whether the number of match games indicated by the match command is 0. If the number of match games indicated by the match command is not 0, this means that a match game number lottery was held in the first effect determination process or the second effect determination process, i.e., it has been decided that the match effect will start from the current game. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7302, where the number of match games indicated by the match command is set in the announcement game number counter. In step S7303, it is determined whether the number of additional games indicated by the match command is 0. If the number of additional games indicated by the match command is not 0, this means that the additional lottery has been won, so the process proceeds to step S7304, where the number of additional games indicated by the match command is set in the announcement game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Thereafter, in step S7305, a win flag is set, and in step S7306, the effect game number counter is set to 0, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S7303 that the number of bonus games indicated by the competition command is 0, this means that the main control unit 101 has decided to start the competition presentation without having won the bonus lottery. In this case, a defeat flag is set in step S7307, and the presentation game number counter is set to 0 in step S7306, terminating this processing.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the number of match games indicated by the match command is 0, this means that the additional lottery was won during the match presentation. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S7308, where the number of additional games indicated by the match command is added to the value of the game number counter for notification. In the following step S7309, it is determined whether or not the defeat flag has been set. If the defeat flag has been set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S7310, and the win flag is set in step S7311, and this processing ends. If the win flag has been set instead of the defeat flag, this processing ends as is.

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in notification mode.

In step S7401, it is determined whether the win flag is set. If the win flag is not set, it is determined in step S7402 whether the defeat flag is set. If the win flag or defeat flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7403, where the showdown effect processing described above is performed. Note that if the win effect is started in the showdown effect processing (step S6605, see FIG. 95), after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, the value stored in the notification game number counter, i.e., the number of added games, is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. If the showdown effect processing is performed, or if it is determined in step S7402 that the defeat flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7404, where it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process ends. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S7405, where the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the operation sequence that can result in a bell win, and the process ends. At this time, if a showdown effect is being performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, both the showdown effect and the operation sequence that can result in a bell win will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Some recent slot machines notify players of whether they have won an additional lottery through a series of consecutive effects that are performed across multiple games. While this configuration allows players to anticipate winning the additional lottery across multiple games, there is a concern that the series of effects cannot be performed in situations where the number of games required to perform the series of effects cannot be secured, which could lead to monotony in gameplay.

In view of this, the slot machine 10 is configured to derive the number of games missing when it is decided to execute a showdown effect in the notification mode. If the number of games missing is one or more, the number of games missing is added to the value of the transition game number counter, i.e., the number of games missing is added to the number of games remaining in the notification mode. This configuration makes it possible to configure the notification mode not to end until the showdown effect ends, making it possible to execute the showdown effect even when the number of games remaining in the notification mode is low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous even when the number of games remaining in the notification mode is low, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in a configuration that allows a showdown effect to be executed when there are only a few games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible that the player will be very disappointed if the notification mode ends with the end of a defeat showdown effect, for example. This is because some players may wish the notification mode had ended without the showdown effect if they had not won the additional lottery, or they may think that they lost out because they were hoping to win the additional lottery. However, in a configuration that adds the number of games in shortfall to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, the number of games that can be played in the notification mode increases by the number of games in shortfall, even if the player has not won the additional lottery. This makes it possible to alleviate the player's disappointment.

In addition, by adding the number of games in short supply to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the showdown effects while increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, it is possible to configure the game so that the showdown effects are not executed when the number of games remaining in the notification mode falls below the maximum set number of showdown games (hereinafter referred to as the "maximum number of showdown games"). However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the number of remaining games falls below the maximum number of showdown games, despite the need for processing to check the number of remaining games. To address this concern, it is also possible to configure the game so that other auxiliary effects that are completed in one game are executed after the number of remaining games falls below the maximum number of showdown games. However, with such a configuration, it becomes necessary to store these other auxiliary effects in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the number of games remaining. On the other hand, a configuration that adds the number of games in short supply to the number of games remaining in the notification mode can effectively address each of the above concerns.

In the second effect determination process, which is performed when the additional lottery is won, if it is decided to perform a showdown effect, the number of games needed is calculated, and then the number of additional games is added to the value of the transition game number counter. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a situation where part of the number of additional games is consumed during the showdown effect.

If the number of games missing is 0 or less, the value of the transition game counter is not changed, meaning the number of games remaining in the notification mode does not change. This configuration makes it possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase as the showdown effect is executed to situations where the number of remaining games is low, i.e., when the end of the notification mode is imminent. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay features when the end of the notification mode is near, and to increase interest in the game. The fewer the number of games remaining at the start of the showdown effect, the greater the increase in the number of remaining games as the showdown effect is executed, making it possible to play while building anticipation for the start of the showdown effect itself.

If the match effect lottery is won, the number of match games is set to a value between 3 and 5, regardless of whether the additional lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to increase interest in the game when the end of the notification mode is approaching. For example, if the match effect is started when the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 4, if the number of match games acquired is 5, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will increase by 1, but if the number of match games acquired is 4 or 3, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will not change. Therefore, when the match effect is started, it is possible to encourage the player to play not only because they have won the additional lottery, but also because they are excited that the match effect will continue for a long time.

The configuration is such that the number of remaining games in the announcement mode is not checked when conducting the showdown effect lottery. As described above, by adding the number of games insufficient to the number of remaining games in the announcement mode, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the effect without being restricted by the number of remaining games in the announcement mode. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration related to the showdown effect while increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the showdown effect lottery is won in the notification mode, the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is set, the showdown effect lottery and the showdown game number lottery are not held. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the number of games for which the showdown effect is executed from being changed midway. As a result, even if the number of games insufficient is added to the number of games remaining in the notification mode, it is possible to avoid an event where the notification mode does not end as a result of the number of games for which the showdown effect is executed being changed midway.

If an additional lottery is won during a defeat showdown effect, the effect switches to a victory showdown effect without changing the length of the showdown effect. This configuration simplifies the processing while preventing the showdown effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

If an additional lottery is won during the victory showdown effect, the number of additional games will be announced all at once without changing the length of the showdown effect. This configuration simplifies the processing while preventing the showdown effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

As described above, when a showdown effect is started in notification mode, the length of the showdown effect is not changed during the showdown effect, thereby preventing the purpose of the showdown effect, which is to notify whether or not a bonus lottery result has been won, from being undermined. In this slot machine 10, which adds the number of games insufficient to the number of games remaining in notification mode, if the length of the showdown effect could be changed during the showdown effect, there is a possibility that the player's interest will be focused on the continuation of the showdown effect rather than the result of the bonus lottery.

In the notification mode, the main control device 101 is configured to decide whether or not to execute the showdown effect, whether or not the additional lottery is won. This configuration makes it possible to execute the showdown effect even when there are only a few games left in the notification mode, and prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous as the notification mode nears its end. For example, if the display control device 81 were configured to decide whether or not to execute the showdown effect, when there are only a few games left in the notification mode, it would not be possible to decide to execute the showdown effect unless the additional lottery is won.

In chance mode, the display control device 81 is configured to decide whether to execute a showdown effect when the transition lottery is not won. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of processing programs pre-stored in the main control device 101, thereby preventing an increase in storage capacity. That is, in notification mode, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode may end depending on the number of games remaining in the notification mode. On the other hand, in chance mode, if the transition lottery is not won, the chance mode will continue. Therefore, even if the display control device 81 is configured to decide whether to execute a showdown effect, there is no possibility that the processing configuration for determining whether to execute a showdown effect will become complicated or that restrictions will be placed on the effects that can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing programs pre-stored in the main control device 101, preventing an increase in storage capacity.

When the transition lottery is won in chance mode, the main control unit 101 is configured to set the value obtained in the match game number lottery to the transition game number counter and send a match command to the display control unit 81. The display control unit 81 is then configured to control the execution of the match presentation for the number of games indicated by the match command, and the main control unit 101 is configured to transition to notification mode when three coins have been played corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player of the transition from chance mode to notification mode using the match presentation before actually transitioning to the game mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In chance mode, if the transition lottery is won during a defeat showdown presentation, the defeat showdown presentation ends midway and the victory showdown presentation starts from the beginning, i.e., the number of games to be played during the showdown presentation is changed midway. With this configuration, even if the display control device 81 decides to execute a showdown presentation, it is possible to execute a victory showdown presentation to notify the player that the mode will be changed to the notification mode. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the showdown presentation is restarted from the beginning during the showdown presentation, the transition to the notification mode is confirmed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented, for example, as follows:

(1) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game immediately transitions to the main game. However, the rotation speed of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be slowed down for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) before returning to a steady rotation speed, and then the game transitions to the main game. With this configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game is ending through the change in the rotation speed of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the game immediately transitions to the main game. However, the game may be transitioned to the main game after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are brought to a pseudo-stop, or after one or two reels are brought to a pseudo-stop.

When the configuration is such that the transition to the actual game occurs after one or two reels have been pseudo-stopped, it is possible to transition from the pseudo game to the actual game more quickly than when the configuration is such that the transition to the actual game occurs after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been pseudo-stopped. Furthermore, with this configuration, the transition to the actual game can be signaled by the pseudo-stopped reels starting to spin again, which prevents the player from becoming confused about whether they are in the pseudo game or the actual game.

(3) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, the pseudo game is terminated after all rotating reels have come to a pseudo-stop. However, the pseudo game may also be terminated without bringing all rotating reels to a pseudo-stop. In such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform processing to start spinning only the pseudo-stopped reels, making it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the actual game. Furthermore, in such a configuration, the transition to the actual game can be notified by the pseudo-stopped reels starting to spin again, making it possible to avoid the player becoming confused about whether they are playing a pseudo game or an actual game.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, when a rotating reel is pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, the same processing is performed as when a pseudo-stop command is issued. However, a different processing may be performed than when a pseudo-stop command is issued. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the stopping results of the symbols when the stop switches 42-44 are operated to pseudo-stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated to pseudo-stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of the settlement switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42-44, allowing the player to choose which operation to use.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are brought to a pseudo-stop immediately at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the stopping position of the symbols. With this configuration, it is possible to generate an event such as a symbol stopping at a position half a symbol away from the center line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, even if the bonus lottery is won, the spinning reels will be pseudo-stopped so that the "red 7" symbol combination does not stop on the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the spinning reels are pseudo-stopped at a position that is half the symbol away from the stop position when a pseudo-stop command is issued.

(5) In the first embodiment described above, when the settlement switch 59 is operated during a simulated game, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed. However, this is not limited to the operation of the settlement switch 59, and any operation that does not affect the progress of the game after the start of a game round may be performed. Therefore, it may be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, or to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated. It may also be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated.

Also, instead of or in addition to a configuration that determines whether a cancel operation has been performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the simulated game is terminated if a predetermined time has passed without a pseudo-stop command being issued.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, all spinning reels are caused to come to a pseudo-stop. However, it is also possible to have a configuration where only one of the spinning reels is caused to come to a pseudo-stop. In such a configuration, when one reel has come to a pseudo-stop, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice to cause all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to come to a pseudo-stop.

(7) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, the simulated game is ended immediately, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated when at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. However, it is acceptable as long as the processing performed when ending the simulated game differs depending on the number of pseudo-stopped reels or the number of pseudo-stop commands issued.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, one reel will be pseudo-stopped, but the pseudo game will end without pseudo-stopping the other two reels. If the settlement switch 59 is operated when one reel is pseudo-stopped, the other two reels will be pseudo-stopped, and then the pseudo game will end. If the settlement switch 59 is operated when two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game will end without pseudo-stopping the other reel.

(8) In the first embodiment described above, the reel rotation speed in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the actual game are configured to be the same, but the reel rotation speed in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the actual game may also be configured to be different.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the stop information setting process is performed after the spin start process. However, if the stop information setting process is performed before determining whether a pseudo-stop command has occurred, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have begun rotating at a constant speed, or after the instruction monitor display process has been performed.

(10) In the first embodiment described above, a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning an additional lottery and a slide table for pseudo stop control in pseudo games based on winning a pseudo game lottery were stored in advance, and the slide tables were referenced when a pseudo stop command was issued. However, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined in step S1103 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104, where if the pseudo game is based on a win in the additional lottery, the stop pattern number is set to "15". If the pseudo game is based on a win in the pseudo game lottery, the stop pattern number is set to "15" if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, and the stop pattern number is set to "16" if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel 32R. Once the stop pattern number has been set, the processes of steps S1107 and S1108 are not performed.

With this configuration, in addition to achieving the same effects as the above-mentioned embodiment, it is possible to reduce the amount of data because there is no need to prepare a slide table in advance.

(11) In the first embodiment described above, the pseudo game was configured to allow a maximum of 19 symbols to slide, but it may also be configured to cause the pseudo game to stop within a predetermined time after a pseudo stop command is issued, as in the actual game.

However, if such a configuration is used and pseudo-game stop information is set after a pseudo-stop command is issued, it is possible that the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information may make it impossible to slide four symbols.

Therefore, when configuring a system to perform stop control similar to that of the actual game, the stop information setting process is configured to set stop information for the actual game and stop information for the pseudo game. In this case, the stop information for the actual game is configured to be set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for the pseudo game is configured to be set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

With this configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process will be longer, it will be possible to quickly transition from pseudo-game to actual game because there will be no need to set stop information for actual game when transitioning from pseudo-game to actual game.

In this case, when setting pseudo game stop information based on an additional lottery win, the stop information set when only BB1 is won in the actual game is set as the pseudo game stop information, and when setting pseudo game stop information based on a pseudo game lottery win, the stop information set when the actual game is lost is set as the pseudo game stop information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to share pseudo game stop information and stop information for the actual game, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the first embodiment described above, the stop information setting process was configured not to set pseudo-game stop information, but this configuration will be changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in Figure 15, step S403 determines whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the stop information setting process sets stop information for the pseudo game instead of stop information for the actual game. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the stop information setting process sets stop information for the actual game. At this time, if stop information for the pseudo game is set, that is, after the pseudo game has ended, the stop information for the pseudo game is rewritten with stop information for the actual game. In other words, the memory area in which the stop information for the pseudo game is set and the memory area in which the stop information for the actual game is set are the same area. Step S1104 in the stop position determination process is not performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop information storage area 106b from becoming too large.

In this case, when setting pseudo game stop information based on an additional lottery win, the stop information set when only BB1 is won in the actual game is set as the pseudo game stop information, and when setting pseudo game stop information based on a pseudo game lottery win, the stop information set when the actual game is lost is set as the pseudo game stop information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to share pseudo game stop information and stop information for the actual game, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the first embodiment described above, a slide table for the simulated game is prepared in advance, but it may also be configured to set stop information in the same way as in the actual game.

(14) In the first embodiment described above, when the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stops on the center line L2 during a pseudo game, a bonus is awarded to notify the player that the net increase in coins will increase. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and any bonus different from the bonus awarded when a winning combination such as a medal payout is awarded may be awarded. Typical examples of bonuses different from the bonus awarded when a winning combination is established include, for example, the execution of a setting suggestion effect or a suggestion of a winning combination in the subsequent actual game.

(15) In the first embodiment described above, a pseudo game is played when the additional lottery is won and when the pseudo game lottery is won, but the conditions for playing a pseudo game are arbitrary.

For example, a simulated game can be played in the final game of the notification mode.

For example, if a rare combination is won, a pseudo-game will be played regardless of whether the bonus lottery is won or not.

(16) In the first embodiment described above, if the additional lottery is won, a pseudo game is executed in that game round. However, a pseudo game may also be executed in the next game round after the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, it is possible to start the next game round after the player has understood that they have won a rare combination, i.e., that an additional lottery has been held. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game round while building anticipation for the start of a pseudo game, which makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Note that a pseudo game may also be executed not in the next game round but in a predetermined number of game rounds, such as after five games.

(17) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, no notification is given as to whether or not an additional bonus has been added. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a notification is given as to whether or not an additional bonus has been added.

(18) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, no notification is given as to whether or not an additional coin has been added, and if the additional coin lottery is won, the remaining payout number displayed in the main game is updated. However, the remaining payout number displayed in the main game may not be updated even if the additional coin lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced additional coin number may be announced in a subsequent pseudo-game, or may be announced in the final game of the announcement mode.

(19) In the first embodiment described above, the auxiliary display unit 65 was configured to notify the player that a pseudo game was in progress, but this configuration is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it includes a means for notifying the player that a pseudo game is in progress. In other words, a pseudo game lamp that is lit only during a pseudo game may be provided, or the stopped reels may be caused to swing up and down during a pseudo game to notify the player that a pseudo game is in progress.

(20) In the second embodiment, the standby process is configured to wait for 100 msec, but the length of the standby process can be any length that allows the reel oscillation to converge.

(21) In the second embodiment described above, a standby process is performed for 100 msec after determining that the instruction monitor is not currently being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor. However, this is not limited to this position, and the standby process can be performed at any position after determining that the value of the reel spin counter is 0, i.e., after determining the stop positions of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the closer to the process of determining whether the value of the reel spin counter is 0, the more likely it is that the standby time in the standby process will need to be set to a time longer than 100 msec, which raises concerns that this may result in a longer wait time until the next game can be started.

(22) In the second embodiment described above, after determining that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is determined whether all stop switches 42-44 have become unoperated. However, it may also be configured to determine whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers after determining that all stop switches 42-44 have become unoperated. Furthermore, in such a configuration, it may also be configured to determine whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers after sending an operation end command. In other words, it may be configured to send an all-reel stop completion command after sending an operation end command.

(23) In the second embodiment described above, after the all reels have stopped command was sent, it was determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 were in an unoperated state. However, the all reels have stopped command may be sent after it is determined that all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In this case, if the operation end command is sent after the all reels have stopped command, it is expected that the same effects as those of the second embodiment described above can be achieved.

(24) In the second embodiment described above, the order of determining whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, determining whether all stop switches 42 to 44 have become unoperated, and sending the all-reel stop completion command and operation end command are the same. However, a different order may be used. For example, after determining that the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stopped symbol numbers, a determination is made as to whether all stop switches 42 to 44 have become unoperated, while the command sending order is such that the operation end command is sent followed by the all-reel stop completion command. However, such a configuration may complicate the processing configuration and increase the memory capacity.

(25) In the second embodiment described above, an all-reel stop completion command is sent when the pattern numbers of the reached patterns on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R match the stop pattern numbers. However, stop completion commands for the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R may be sent individually. More specifically, if it is determined in step S2204 that the left reel 32L and right reel 32R have reached the stop pattern numbers but the center reel 32M has not reached the stop pattern number, a left reel stop completion command and a right reel stop completion command are sent, and the process waits until the center reel 32M reaches the stop pattern number. Then, if the center reel 32M has reached the stop pattern number, the center reel stop completion command is sent and the process proceeds to step S2206. In this configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output a third notification sound when it receives all of the left reel stop completion command, center reel stop completion command, and right reel stop completion command, it is expected that the same effects as those of the second embodiment described above will be achieved.

The same applies to operation end commands; the left operation end command, center operation end command, and right operation end command may be sent separately.

(26) In the second embodiment described above, a command to stop all reels and a command to end operation are sent during the actual game. However, in a configuration in which a pseudo game is performed, such as the first embodiment described above, a command to stop all reels and a command to end operation may also be sent during the pseudo game.

(27) In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header were both configured as one byte, but it goes without saying that they may be configured as two or more bytes.

(28) In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured to occupy the same byte, but they may be configured to occupy different bytes. For example, the pseudo game flag storage area may be configured to occupy one byte, and the header may be configured to occupy two bytes. Even in such a configuration, if the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area to a predetermined one byte of the header information, the same effect as in the third embodiment described above can be achieved.

(29) In the third embodiment described above, the header information to be transmitted in the event of a game is stored in advance, but this configuration will be changed.

In the third embodiment described above, the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area and the header was left blank, but the fifth bit is configured to function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. When clearing the pseudo game flag (step S611, see FIG. 17 or step S1004, see FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0" and the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1". When setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1" and the fifth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0".

Even with this configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above can be achieved.

(30) In the third embodiment described above, the information indicating whether or not a game is a pseudo-game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body or the header. Even in these configurations, if the body to be transmitted is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the body information, or if the header to be transmitted is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment described above will be achieved.

(31) In the third embodiment described above, the header is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information. However, even if the header is created by performing other predetermined calculations such as subtraction, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

(32) In the third embodiment described above, the commands sent in the case of simulated games and the commands sent in the case of actual games were different, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, the command sent when in the BB state is different from the command sent when in the non-BB state. In such a configuration, if a BB state storage area is provided to store information on whether or not the state is in the BB state, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the BB state storage area and header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the configuration could be such that the command sent when the zone is a normal zone is different from the command sent when the zone is a favorable zone. In such a configuration, if a favorable zone storage area is provided to store information on whether the zone is favorable or not, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the favorable zone storage area and the header information, it would be possible to achieve the same effects as the third embodiment described above.

For example, the configuration can be such that the commands sent in the notification mode (AT game) are different from the commands sent in the non-notification mode (non-AT game). In such a configuration, if an notification mode storage area is provided to store information on whether or not the mode is notification mode, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area to the header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the command sent when three coins are being played can be different from the command sent when two coins are being played. In such a configuration, if a bet number storage area is provided to store information on whether three coins are being played or not, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and the header information, the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, the command sent in the BB1 state (BB state with three coins in play), the command sent in the BB2 state (BB state with two coins in play), and the command sent in the non-BB state can be different. In such a configuration, if a game status storage area is provided that stores information on which game status is in play, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the game status storage area and the header information, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the third embodiment. Note that in order to include information in the header indicating which of the three game statuses is in this way, it is necessary to provide at least two bits in the game status storage area and header for storing the above information.

Naturally, it is also possible to combine the above configurations. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which pseudo game determination information and information stored in the bet number storage area are added to the header information to create a header that indicates whether or not a pseudo game is being played and whether it is a three-coin game or a two-coin game. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a header that indicates whether or not a pseudo game is being played is created by adding pseudo game determination information to the header information, and a body that indicates whether it is a three-coin game or a two-coin game is created by adding information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information.

(33) In the third embodiment described above, when sending a start rotation command, a stop command, or a stop command, the header is created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information. However, it goes without saying that when sending other commands, such as a lottery result command, the header may also be created by adding pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area may be electrically connected to an output port. With such a configuration, when the pseudo game flag is set (a "1" is stored in the sixth bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and when the pseudo game flag is cleared (a "0" is stored in the sixth bit), an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area can be given the functions of information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and information used when outputting a signal indicating that a pseudo game is being executed to the outside of the slot machine 10. As a result, the pseudo game flag storage area can be used effectively, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

(35) In the fourth embodiment described above, the result display is initiated when the effect switch 67 is operated once. However, the above-described effects can be achieved if the result display is initiated based on the operation of the effect switch 67. Therefore, for example, the result display may be initiated when the effect switch 67 is pressed a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, or when the effect switch 67 is pressed and held for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds.

(36) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-button display is initiated when an operation end command is received, but it may also be initiated when an all-reel stop completion command is received. It may also be initiated when a section command is received, or when a state command is received. In any of these configurations, the push-button display is initiated after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and therefore the above-described effects can be achieved.

(37) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-button display is initiated when an operation end command is received. However, the push-button display may also be initiated in the middle of a game round, for example, when it is determined in the effect determination process that a push-button effect will be executed. In such a configuration, the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56 is configured to determine whether or not the completion flag is set in step S3601. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation is immediately enabled, just as in the case where a push-button effect is not executed. If the completion flag is not set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, as described in the fourth embodiment described above.

(38) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after the push display begins. However, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when an operation end command is received, or when an all reels stop completion command is received. Furthermore, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when a section command is received, or when a state command is received. Even with these configurations, the above-described effects can be achieved because only the start time of the first timer changes.

(39) In the fourth embodiment described above, the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed. However, the second timer may be set to 500 when the result display is initiated. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the above-described effects can be achieved.

Note that if the configuration is such that a completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300 and result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the display counter used in the fourth embodiment above will be unnecessary.

Furthermore, if step S4104 of the press performance processing shown in FIG. 61 is configured to determine whether the value of the second timer is less than or equal to 300, a completion flag is not necessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the second timer was set to 300 when the result display was completed, but this configuration will be changed.

Specifically, when the result display is completed, the system determines whether the value of the first timer is 0. If the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer reaches 0, i.e., the value of the second timer is not referenced, and the result display process ends without setting the value of the second timer to 300. On the other hand, if the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, reaches 0, and the result display process ends after setting the value of the second timer to 300.

With the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to configure the second timer not to operate when a menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer not to operate when a menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

(41) In the fourth embodiment described above, a first timer is provided in the display control device 81, and a menu start operation may be enabled based on the value of the first timer. However, a first timer may be provided in the main control device 101, and a time elapsed command may be sent to the display control device 81 when the value of the first timer reaches 0. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the display control device 81 receives the time elapsed command, the display control device 81 terminates the press effect processing and enables the subsequent menu start operation. In addition, if the completion flag is not set when the display control device 81 receives the time elapsed command, the display control device 81 terminates the press effect processing and enables the subsequent menu start operation when the value of the second timer reaches 0. In such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment described above, the main control device 101 can specify the start timing of the press display and the timing when the menu start operation becomes enabled, thereby reducing the chance of malfunction.

The first timer may be set to 1000 when it is determined in step S3304 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached their stop positions, or when it is determined in step S3306 that all stop switches 42 to 44 have reached their unoperated states. It may also be set at another time, such as after an operation end command is sent.

(42) In the fourth embodiment described above, the result display executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display executed when the additional lottery is not won are configured to take the same amount of time to complete, but it goes without saying that a different configuration is also possible. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after the result display is completed, when the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, it is possible to make the time from when the result display is completed to when the menu start operation becomes enabled constant.

(43) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and the standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18,000 during the press effect processing. However, if the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, the press effect processing may be terminated after the value of the standby timer is set to 18,000. In such a configuration, the customer wait effect will begin approximately 180 seconds after the press effect processing is terminated.

(45) In the fourth embodiment described above, if the press effect is not executed, the menu start operation is immediately enabled. However, even if the press effect is not executed, the menu start operation may be enabled after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed. To achieve this, for example, in the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55, if it is determined that an operation end command has been received, the standby timer value is set to 18,000 and the first timer value is set to 1,000. In step S3505, the first timer value is not set to 1,000. Then, in the start wait processing shown in FIG. 56, if it is determined that the effect flag has not been set, it is determined whether the first timer value has reached 0. If it is determined that the first timer value has reached 0, the processing shown in step S3603 and subsequent steps is performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment described above, when a menu start operation is performed, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. However, a menu screen display unit may be provided separately from the auxiliary display unit 65, and the menu screen may be displayed on the menu screen display unit at all times.

(47) In the fourth embodiment described above, the effect switch 67 has the function of progressing the press effect and the function of displaying the menu screen, but an operation switch for displaying the menu screen may also be provided separately from the effect switch 67.

(48) In the fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and clear game history. However, the types and number of selection menus are arbitrary. Therefore, the selection menu may include a payout table and volume adjustment, or only volume adjustment. It goes without saying that in a configuration where only one type of game information is displayed, the game information can be displayed directly rather than the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated.

(49) In the fourth embodiment described above, the push-down effect is configured to notify the player of whether or not the additional lottery has been won, but this is not limited to such a configuration. It may also be configured to notify the player of whether or not the transition lottery in chance mode has been won, or to notify the player of the winning combination.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration using a subtractive timer was described, but it goes without saying that an incrementing timer may also be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment described above, the first timer was configured to start counting down when the value of the first timer was set to 1000. However, this configuration is modified. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at any timing before the start of the push display, such as when a start command is issued. Then, in step S3505 of the operation end command processing (see FIG. 55), the first timer is allowed to count down. Even with this configuration, the first timer is activated when the processing of step S3505 is performed, and therefore the effects described in the fourth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(52) In the fourth embodiment described above, if a bet number command indicating that the bet number has reached 1 or more is received during the press effect processing, the press effect processing may be terminated and the process may proceed to wait for a start command. In such a configuration, the press effect display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will end at the time the player bets medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the fourth embodiment described above, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when a press effect is executed has been focused on, and the explanation has been given from that perspective. However, it is clear that the same effect as described above can also be achieved with respect to the timing at which the display transitions to the customer waiting display when a press effect is executed. This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the value of the waiting timer has reached 0 after the press effect process has ended.

(54) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game number, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. However, the end screen may also be displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

(55) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the notification mode ends due to the consumption of the transition game number, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game of the notification mode. However, if the end screen is displayed before at least one reel stops, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. This is because sufficient time can be secured to display the end screen.

In this case, if the ending screen is configured to be displayed after the two reels have stopped, it will be possible to determine whether or not a bell win has occurred if at least the push order bell is won, and it will be possible to display the difference in the number of coins won at the end of the notification mode as the number of coins displayed on the ending screen.

(56) In the fifth embodiment described above, an ending effect is displayed when the notification mode ends with a difference of 2,400 coins. However, an ending effect may also be displayed when the notification mode ends with a difference of 1,500 games in the interval.

(57) In the fifth embodiment described above, the notification mode is ended based on the number of games played in the notification mode. However, the notification mode may also be ended based on the number of times the operation sequence performed in the notification mode is not notified. Even in such a configuration, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved by displaying the end screen based on the reception of a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won, rather than based on the reception of a start command.

(58) In the fifth embodiment described above, only the display control device 81 is configured to know the number of games to be notified, but it is also possible to configure only the main control device 101 to know the number of games to be notified, or to configure both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 to know the number of games to be notified.

(59) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the player wins the bonus lottery, the number of bonus games is announced in the pseudo game and in the revival effect. However, the number of bonus games may be announced only in the revival effect.

(60) In the fifth embodiment described above, an additional lottery is held when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration can be used as long as it is possible to notify the player that the notification mode will continue using a revival effect. For example, the notification mode may be configured to end after one set of 50 games, and a lottery to add to the number of sets (a revival lottery or a continuation lottery) may be held in a specified game, such as when the notification mode is entered or when one set ends.

(61) In the fifth embodiment described above, the conditions for confirming the end of the notification mode due to a difference of 2400 were that the number of games remaining was greater than 50 and that the difference of coins was greater than 2200, but the conditions can be set arbitrarily. Only the number of games remaining or only the difference of coins may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the end of the notification mode is confirmed due to a difference of 2400 coins, the ending effect is configured to start from the next game. However, the timing of starting the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be configured to start from the next game when the difference of coins reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be configured to start from the next game when the difference of coins reaches 2250. In other words, the ending effect may start from the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment described above, the end screen is displayed continuously until the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode occurs. However, the end screen may be displayed only in the first game, and other auxiliary effects may be executed from the second game onwards.

(64) In the fifth embodiment described above, the advantageous zone ends when the notification mode ends, and the event of the advantageous zone ending does not occur in the chance mode. However, the advantageous zone may end in the chance mode. For example, the chance mode may be configured to hold a lottery to determine the end of the advantageous zone in addition to a lottery to transition to the notification mode, or the chance mode may be transitioned to after the notification mode ends.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the system is configured not to transition from the normal section to the notification mode, but it may be configured to transition to the notification mode.

(66) In the fifth embodiment described above, a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel is displayed when the lottery for transitioning to chance mode is not won. However, instead of or in addition to this, a suggestion jewel or a fixed jewel may be displayed when the lottery for transitioning to chance mode is won.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggesting jewel or the fixed jewel. However, any other configuration that suggests or notifies advantageous information that is advantageous to the player can achieve the effects described in the fifth embodiment. Representative examples of advantageous information include a configuration that suggests or notifies the destination of the chance mode in a configuration with multiple chance modes that have different winning probabilities for the transition lottery to the notification mode, or a configuration that suggests or notifies the set ceiling game number in a configuration in which multiple ceiling game numbers (transition game numbers) can be set in the chance mode.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the fixed jewel is displayed from the sixth game onwards in the normal section, but it may also be configured to display the fixed jewel with a predetermined probability in the first to fifth games in the normal section. In other words, it is sufficient that the accuracy of the setting suggestion increases depending on the number of games played in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment described above, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of display is arbitrary. Also, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels are hidden after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, but they may be continuously displayed until the game transitions to chance mode. Furthermore, in a configuration capable of displaying a menu screen, when the game history is selected, the suggestion jewels and fixed jewels that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed.

(70) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen displayed the fact that the notification mode has ended and the number of medals acquired. However, the end screen may be configured to display only the fact that the notification mode has ended, or may display only the number of medals acquired. Furthermore, the display of the end of the notification mode is not limited to actual text such as "End of notification mode," and may also display the end of the notification mode by a specified action such as a specified character crying and waving its hands.

(71) In the fifth embodiment described above, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of medals won is not changed thereafter. However, when the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, the display of the number of medals won may be changed depending on the game result of the final game (whether or not a win is achieved). Furthermore, the display of the number of medals won may also be changed during the normal interval.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, two winning combinations, Left-Centre-Right Bell 1 and Left-Centre-Right Bell 2, were provided for when a bell win occurs in the left-centre-right operation sequence. However, it goes without saying that only one combination is sufficient. The same applies to left-centre-right bells, centre-left-right bells, centre-right-left bells, right-left-centre bells, and right-centre-left bells.

(73) In the sixth embodiment described above, for example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of center left and right, the small prize 3 is achieved regardless of whether the winning combination is center left right bell 1, center left left bell 2, or the first special bell. However, the type of bell prize that is achieved may differ depending on the winning combination. For example, if center left left bell 1 is won, small prize 3 is achieved, if center left left bell 2 is won, small prize 4 is achieved, and if the first special bell is won, small prize 1 is achieved. Even with this configuration, the event of achieving a bell prize that results in the payout of eight medals remains unchanged, and therefore the same effects as in the sixth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(74) In the sixth embodiment described above, there are six different operation sequences that can result in a bell win, but the type of operation sequence can be any. For example, there may be three different sequences depending on which of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, or two different sequences depending on whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Alternatively, there may be four different sequences, such as center left/right, center right/left, right left/center, and right center left. If, in addition to the above operation sequences, it is also required to operate a specific stop switch at a specific timing, more than six different types of push order bells can be set.

(75) In the sixth embodiment, the left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 and the left, right, and center bells 1 and 2 are included in push order group 1, while the winning combination that results in a bell win in the above operation sequence is not included in push order group 2. However, if the winning combinations in all operation sequences that can result in a bell win are included in push order group 1, and the winning combinations in a specific operation sequence that can result in a bell win are not included in push order group 2, the same effects as those in the sixth embodiment can be achieved.

(76) In the sixth embodiment, the winning probabilities of winning roles belonging to push order group 1 are equal. However, the winning probabilities of winning roles belonging to push order group 1 may be different. For example, in push order group 1, the point value PV of left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 and left, center, and right bells 1 and 2 is 1960, and the point value PV of other push order bells is 1990. Even with this configuration, if the operation order is always notified when push order group 2 is won, the difference in the frequency of bell wins due to the operation order can be reduced when the operation order is not notified in notification mode A and notification mode B. As a result, it is possible to prevent disparities in profits between players depending on their level of knowledge about the slot machine 10, and to allow players to enjoy the game regardless of their level of knowledge.

(77) In the sixth embodiment described above, if push order group 2 is selected in notification mode, the operation sequence is always announced. However, the operation sequence may be announced with a predetermined probability, such as 90%, for example. Even with such a configuration, if the operation sequence is not announced in notification mode A and notification mode B, the difference in the frequency of bell wins depending on the operation sequence can be reduced.

In addition, if the operation sequence is not announced when push order group 2 is selected, it is desirable to display "×??" on the auxiliary display unit 65, indicating that the operation sequence is based on the center or right.

(78) In the sixth embodiment described above, the navigation determination process makes a determination based on the push order group, so that when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the operation order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. However, this configuration will be changed.

Figure 90 shows another example of a lottery table. Note that in Figure 90, to facilitate comparison with the sixth embodiment, the first to fourth special bells are listed and the point value PV is set to 0 (no win), but these are unnecessary.

A point value PV of 1980 is set for left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, and left-center-left Bell 2, and a point value PV of 4070 is set for center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, center-right-left Bell 2, right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, and right-center-left Bell 2.

Left-center-right Bell 1, left-center-right Bell 2, left-center-left Bell 1, and left-center-left Bell 2 are the left correct bells, center-left-right Bell 1, center-left-right Bell 2, center-right-left Bell 1, and center-right-left Bell 2 are the center correct bells, and right-left-center Bell 1, right-left-center Bell 2, right-center-left Bell 1, and right-center-left Bell 2 are the right correct bells. In this case, the probability of winning the left correct bell is 7920 in 65,535, the probability of winning the center correct bell is 16,280 in 65,535, and the probability of winning the right correct bell is 16,280 in 65,535.

In notification mode A, if the left correct bell is won, it is determined that there is a 0 in 7920 chance of navigation, if the middle correct bell is won, it is determined that there is an 8360 in 16280 chance of navigation, and if the right correct bell is won, it is determined that there is an 8360 in 16280 chance of navigation.

With this configuration, the value for determining that navigation will not be performed will be 7920 regardless of whether the correct left bell, center bell, or right bell is the correct left bell. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

In notification mode B, if the left correct bell is won, there is a 1920/7920 chance of navigation; if the middle correct bell is won, there is a 10280/16280 chance of navigation; and if the right correct bell is won, there is a 10280/16280 chance of navigation.

With this configuration, the value for determining that navigation will not be performed will be 6000 regardless of whether the correct left bell, center bell, or right bell is the correct right bell. Therefore, when the operation order is not notified in notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

(79) In the sixth embodiment, the system is configured to have three types of notification modes, A, B, and C, which have different navigation rates. However, the system may be configured to have only notification mode A or B, or may have any two of the three modes. It may also be configured to have four or more notification modes with different navigation rates.

(80) In the sixth embodiment described above, when transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, notification mode A is started, but this is not limited to such a configuration, and notification mode B or C may be started with a predetermined probability.

(81) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, the promotion effect is always performed, but the promotion effect may also be performed with a predetermined probability.

(82) In the sixth embodiment described above, a promotion lottery is held when a bell win is achieved in a game in which a promotion effect is performed. However, a promotion lottery may be held regardless of whether a bell win is achieved. Furthermore, a point lottery may be held when a bell win is achieved in a game in which a promotion effect is performed, and the navigation rate may be increased when a predetermined point value is reached.

(83) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the operation sequence is not notified in the notification mode, a promotion lottery may be held. However, instead of or in addition to this, a bonus lottery that increases the value of the transition game number counter may be held.

(84) In the sixth embodiment described above, when a rare combination is won in notification mode, an additional lottery is held. However, instead of or in addition to this, a promotion lottery may be held.

(85) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion effect displayed "???" to prompt the player to select one of six possible operation sequences, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, the stop switch to be operated first may be displayed as "1??", "?1?", "??1", and the player may then select the stop switch to be operated second or subsequent times.

Alternatively, the stop switch to be operated last can be displayed as "3??", "?3?", "??3", and the player can select the first and second stop switches to operate.

(86) In the sixth embodiment described above, if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section or chance mode, the result of the transition lottery is invalidated even if the player wins. However, this configuration will be changed.

For example, the transition lottery is configured to be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to high, and if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to low.

For example, the transition lottery may be configured to be held after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the transition lottery will be held, but if the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, the transition lottery will not be held.

(87) In the sixth embodiment described above, when the push order bell is won, either a bell win in which eight medals are paid out or a win in which one medal is paid out is always achieved. However, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that does not allow a bell win to be achieved, a missed win in which neither win is achieved may occur.

(88) In the seventh embodiment described above, if 700 three-coin games are played in chance mode without winning the transition lottery, the next game will transition to notification mode. However, similar to when the transition lottery is won, the next game may transition to notification mode after 3 to 5 games of showdown presentation. Also, if 697 three-coin games are played in chance mode without winning the transition lottery, the next game may transition to notification mode after 3 games of showdown presentation.

(89) In the seventh embodiment described above, if the number of games in deficit is one or more, the number of games in deficit is added to the value of the transition game number counter. However, it is also possible to configure it so that this is not added. In such a configuration, if the additional lottery is not won, the notification mode will end in the middle of the showdown presentation, and if the additional lottery is won, part of the additional game number will be consumed during the showdown presentation.

(90) In the seventh embodiment described above, when the bonus lottery is won, the number of bonus games in that game is added to the value of the transition game number counter. However, the number of bonus games may also be added to the value of the transition game number counter when the value of the competition game number counter reaches 0, i.e., after the competition presentation ends.

(91) In the seventh embodiment, if a rare combination is won, a competition effect lottery is held regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won. However, the competition effect lottery may also be held even if a rare combination is not won.

(92) In the seventh embodiment, a value between 3 and 5 was acquired as the number of match games, but the acquired value can be any value. It may be configured to acquire only 3 as the number of match games, or it may be configured to acquire a value between 2 and 10.

(93) In the seventh embodiment described above, the value obtained in the match game number lottery is the same when the additional lottery is won and when the additional lottery is not won, but this may be configured differently.

For example, if the player wins the bonus lottery, the number of games played will be a value between 3 and 5; if the player does not win the bonus lottery, the number of games played will be a value between 5 and 7. With this configuration, if the competition effect continues for six or more games, the player will not win the bonus lottery, but since the number of games missing increases the chances of the notification mode being extended, it is possible to effectively mitigate the player's disappointment.

(94) In the seventh embodiment, if the match-game lottery is won, a predetermined effect is performed in all games corresponding to the match game number. However, it is also possible to configure some games without an effect, such as a premonition effect. For example, if the match game number is 7, a one-game-long promotional effect is performed in the first and third games, no effect is performed in the second and fourth games, and a match-game effect is performed in the fifth through seventh games.

(95) In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of games in which the competition presentation is executed in the notification mode is configured not to change midway, but it may also be configured so that it can be changed midway.

(96) In the seventh embodiment, the auxiliary effects for notifying the player of whether or not they have won the additional lottery include a competition effect and a simulated game, but the configuration may not include a simulated game.

(97) It goes without saying that the seventh embodiment may be configured to include auxiliary effects that are completed in one game in addition to the duel effects. In this case, the decision as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary effects may be made by the display control device 81, since there will be no shortage of games as in the case of duel effects.

(98) In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode was configured to notify the player of whether or not they had won the additional lottery through a competition presentation, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, in a configuration in which a stock lottery is held in notification mode, the winner of the stock lottery will be notified through a competition effect.

For example, the notification modes may include notification mode A and notification mode B, which can add to the number of games playable in notification mode A with a high probability. If a player wins the transition lottery in notification mode A, the player can play in notification mode B a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, after which the system will return to notification mode A. In this configuration, the player is notified of whether or not they have won the transition lottery through a showdown presentation.

(99) In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which only a showdown effect was provided as an effect that spans multiple games. However, it goes without saying that a configuration may also be used in which effects that span multiple games are provided in addition to the showdown effect. In such a configuration, for example, if effects A and B are provided as effects that span three games, and effects C and D are provided as effects that span four games, the main control device 101 may determine the effect period (3 or 4) for which the effect will be executed, and the display control device 81 may determine which effect to execute depending on the effect period.

(100) In the seventh embodiment described above, it goes without saying that if the display control device 81 decides to execute a defeat showdown effect in chance mode and three coins are played for the 700th time during the defeat showdown effect, the defeat showdown effect may be switched to a victory showdown effect.

(101) In the seventh embodiment described above, if a transition lottery is won during a defeat showdown presentation in chance mode, the defeat showdown presentation ends midway and the victory showdown presentation starts from the beginning. However, as long as the number of games in which the showdown presentation is executed is changed midway, the content of the presentation to be executed is arbitrary. Therefore, in a game in which a victory command is received, i.e., a game in which the transition lottery is won, control may be exercised to output showdown presentation midway video data to the auxiliary display unit 65, rather than control to output showdown presentation start video data to the auxiliary display unit 65.

(102) In each of the above embodiments, the transition lottery and the additional lottery are conducted only in three-coin games, but the transition lottery and the additional lottery may also be conducted in two-coin games.

(103) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is configured to end when the net increase in the number of coins reaches 120. However, the notification mode may also be configured to end when the number of coins paid out reaches 120, or when the number of games played reaches 50.

(104) In each of the above embodiments, a continuation lottery may be conducted in a game that ends the notification mode, or in a game that transitions to the notification mode. A continuation lottery may also be conducted in a specified game in the notification mode. The results of these continuation lotteries may then be announced in a simulated game.

(105) In each of the above embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won in chance mode, but it may also be notified with a lower probability than in notification mode.

(106) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous period ends when the notification mode ends, but the advantageous period may not end when the notification mode ends, and the game may transition to chance mode instead.

(107) In each of the above embodiments, if a winning combination is achieved during a three-coin game, the game transitions from the normal zone to chance mode, and a loss occurs with a probability of approximately 1 in 6.4. However, the loss probability is arbitrary. However, the more games a player plays in the normal zone, the greater the chance that the player will realize that they are in the normal zone, so it is desirable to configure the game so that the probability of winning a winning combination is higher than the probability of a loss.

(108) In the above embodiments, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be located in the lower right corner of the payout number display unit 61, but the interval indicator 66 can be located anywhere. However, to reduce the chances of the player noticing that the advantageous interval has ended, it is desirable to locate it in a location away from the auxiliary display unit 65, and it is desirable to locate it on the settlement switch 59, for example.

(109) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that processing related to game modes such as transition lotteries is performed on the condition that three coins are being played, but the configuration may also be such that processing related to game modes such as transition lotteries is performed on the condition that three coins are being played and the BB state is not being performed.

(110) In the above embodiments, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned OFF during the game interval processing, but it may also be configured to be turned OFF during the start waiting processing. Even with such a configuration, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned OFF after the advantageous interval end game has ended, so it can be expected to achieve the same effects as the above embodiments. Similarly, the interval indicator 66 is configured to be turned ON during the interval lottery processing, but it may also be configured to be turned ON after the rotation start processing and before it is determined whether the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated.

(111) In the above embodiments, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified when the game enters a favorable zone, but this configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the operation timing of a specific stop switch is notified, or to have the operation timing and operation method notified. In other words, the favorable zone can be a game zone in which the instruction function of the stop switch can be activated. The normal zone can be a game zone in which the instruction function of the stop switch to achieve a small winning combination does not operate.

(112) The symbol combinations that result in winning in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these symbol combinations. Furthermore, the number of symbol combinations that result in winning is also arbitrary.

(113) In the above embodiments, slot machines with a BB state have been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The present invention may be a slot machine without a BB state, or a slot machine with both a BB state and an RB state. It may also be a slot machine with other game states such as a CB state or an MB state.

(114) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that it is determined whether a start command has occurred after three or two medals have been bet, but it goes without saying that it may also be configured to determine whether a start command has occurred after one medal has been bet. It also goes without saying that it may be configured to determine whether a start command has occurred only after three medals have been bet, i.e., to allow only three-coin play.

(115) In each of the above embodiments, the awarded benefits include a benefit of changing the game state, a benefit of replaying, and a benefit of paying out medals. However, the invention is not limited to such a configuration, and any benefit may be awarded to the player. For example, instead of a benefit of paying out medals, a prize other than medals may be paid out. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, but rather manages medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a benefit.

(116) In the above embodiments, a slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and one active line has been described, but this configuration is not limited to this. For example, a slot machine having five reels arranged in parallel or a slot machine having five active lines may also be used.

(117) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined in normal processing, and the reel is stopped in timer interrupt processing. However, a configuration in which the reel stop position is determined in normal processing and the reel is stopped at the same time may be adopted. Specifically, when the stop symbol number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination processing shown in FIG. 22, a process is performed to check whether the arrival symbol number and the stop symbol number match, and if they match, the reel is stopped. Then, the process shown in step S1109 and subsequent steps is performed. In such a configuration, after stopping the reel for which a stop command (pseudo stop command) has been issued, a check is made to see whether the next stop command (pseudo stop command) has been issued, making it impossible to issue stop commands (pseudo stop commands) consecutively.

(118) In each of the above embodiments, the reel control process is configured to determine whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed (step S407, see FIG. 15). However, if the time from when the reels start accelerating until they reach a constant speed is uniform, a timer corresponding to that time may be set when the reels start accelerating (step S607, see FIG. 17), and step S407 may wait until the time corresponding to the value of the timer has elapsed. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the above embodiments can be achieved.

(119) In the above embodiments, specific examples have been shown of a slot machine 10, but the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

The gaming machine of the present invention will be described below, highlighting its effects as necessary. Note that, for ease of understanding, the configuration corresponding to the above-described embodiment will be indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration indicated in parentheses.

Gaming machine A1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
a pseudo-game first ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo-game when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of the patterns of the cyclical display means;
When a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulating display means are circulating the patterns, a pseudo game second ending means (a pseudo game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) for ending the pseudo game is executable.
When the control by the pseudo game second ending means is performed, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when specific conditions are met. In the pseudo game, the cyclical display of images begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of the image on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the machine to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

However, it is possible that some players may find it cumbersome to operate the stop operation means during a pseudo game. Therefore, this gaming machine is designed so that the pseudo game ends if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find it cumbersome to operate the stop operation means during a pseudo game from losing their motivation to play once the pseudo game has begun.

Furthermore, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means will not be pseudo-stopped, and the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means will continue, ending the quasi-game. This configuration makes it possible to configure the quasi-stop result of the images in the quasi-game to be unknown unless the stop operation means is operated, making it possible to encourage the player to operate the stop operation means in the quasi-game.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine A2. A gaming machine comprising the above gaming machine A1, but further comprising: second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in the actual game, stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control unit 101) for controlling the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game to start circulating the symbols; and second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 in the actual game, stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control unit 101) for controlling the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the symbols if the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started circulating the symbols; and wherein the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control results of the second stop control means.

With this gaming machine, the cyclical display means that pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images during the pseudo game restarts the cyclical display of images, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of images is stopped. A bonus is then awarded based on the result of the stopped images. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event where the cyclical display of images has not stopped when the next game round is started. Furthermore, with this configuration, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images and the pseudo game ends, control can be performed by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine A2, but further characterized by the addition of a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that a pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is announced that it is a pseudo game. By adopting this configuration, even if the pseudo game ends without the cyclical display of images stopping, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A4. In the gaming machine A2 or A3 described above, the pseudo-game execution means is characterized by including a deceleration means for decelerating the cyclical display of the symbols for a predetermined time when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images will slow down for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the simulated game is ending by notifying them of the slowdown in the cyclical display speed of the images.

Gaming machine A5. In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means comprises specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed via step S1003 of the main control unit 101) that controls the circulating display means that are circulating the images to pseudo-stop all of the circulating display of the images when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the images.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated when at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images is controlled to pseudo-stop all cyclical display of images. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the cyclical game in the middle of a cyclical game without operating the stop operation means can do so by operating the specific operation means without operating the stop operation means.

Gaming machine A6. In the gaming machine A5, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in a different manner from when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying images pseudo-stops the cyclical display of images in a different manner than when the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the cyclical game ends depending on whether the cyclical game is ended by operating a specific operation means or by operating a stop operation means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of a specific operation means and the operation of a stop operation means, allowing the player to choose which operation means to operate.

Gaming machine A7. In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has cyclically stopped the display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without cyclically stopping the display of the symbols by the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine A8. In the gaming machine A7 described above, the second start control means controls the cyclical display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the images to start cyclical display of the images when the quasi-game ends.

With this gaming machine, if there is a cyclical display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images when the quasi-game ends, the cyclical display of the images on that cyclical display means will begin. This configuration makes it possible to play games related to the awarding of bonuses using all cyclical display means.

Gaming machine A9. Any of the gaming machines A2 to A8 described above, characterized in that the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means is equal to the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means.

With this gaming machine, the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the pseudo game is equal to the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the game related to the awarding of a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus in cases such as when a specific operating means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying images.

Gaming machine A10. Any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 described above, further comprising a determination means (main control unit 101's additional lottery win confirmation function S1804) for determining whether to award a specific bonus (an addition to the net increase number counter) different from the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means, and wherein the specific condition is met when the determination means determines that the specific bonus will be awarded.

With this gaming machine, if the bonus awarding means determines that a specific bonus different from the bonus that is actually awarded will be awarded, a specific condition is met and a pseudo-game is executed. This configuration makes it possible to use the pseudo-game as a game to notify the player that a specific bonus will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine A11. This gaming machine is characterized by comprising award notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the special bonus will be awarded if the pseudo-stop result of the symbols becomes a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols stopping on the middle line L2) when controlled by the pseudo-stop control means, and does not notify the player that the special bonus will be awarded if the pseudo-stop result of the symbols does not become the specific stop result.

With this gaming machine, if the simulated stopping result of the symbols in the simulated game becomes a specific stopping result, the player is notified that a specific bonus will be awarded. On the other hand, if the simulated stopping result of the symbols in the simulated game does not become a specific stopping result, the player is not notified that a specific bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to encourage players who want to be notified that a specific bonus will be awarded to operate the stop operation means, while allowing players who do not want to be notified that a specific bonus will be awarded to operate the specific operation means.

Gaming machine A12. The gaming machine A11 described above, further comprising advantageous state transition means (notification mode transition function S1608 of the main control unit 101) for transitioning to an advantageous state (notification mode) advantageous to the player, and number of times information storage means (net increase number counter of the main control unit 101) for storing information relating to the number of times play can be performed in said advantageous state (remaining payout number), wherein the specific benefit is a benefit that increases the number of times play can be performed in said advantageous state.

This gaming machine provides a special bonus that increases the number of plays that can be played under advantageous conditions. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages even when operating specific operating means during simulated play.

Note that "a benefit that increases the number of plays that can be played under an advantageous state" refers to a benefit that increases the number of plays if the advantageous state ends based on the number of plays, and to a benefit that increases the number of gaming media awarded if the advantageous state ends based on the number of gaming media awarded.

Gaming machine A13. Any of the above gaming machines A1 to A12, characterized in that the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

In this gaming machine, the specific operation means is a different operation means from the start operation means and the stop operation means. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if a player repeatedly presses the start operation means to start a game, this could result in the pseudo-game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine B1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
a pseudo-game first ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo-game when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of the patterns of the cyclical display means;
and a pseudo-game second terminating means (a pseudo-game terminating function based on a cancel operation of the main control device 101) for terminating the pseudo-game when a second specific condition (operation of the settlement switch 59) is established.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101 in this game) that controls the start of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the patterns in the pseudo game;
and a second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) for controlling the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns.
The second pseudo-game ending means executes different processes depending on the pseudo-stop state of the cyclic display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

With this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when specific conditions are met. In the pseudo game, the cyclical display of images begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the cyclical display of the image on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the machine to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute auxiliary effects using the cyclical display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The pseudo game is also configured to end when a second specific condition is met, and when the second specific condition is met to end the pseudo game, different processing is executed depending on the pseudo-stop status of the cyclical display means when the second specific condition is met. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the pseudo-stop status of the cyclical display means when the second specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine B2. A gaming machine configured as described above in accordance with the gaming machine B1, in which the second specific condition is met when a specific operation means (adjustment switch 59) is operated, the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control results of the second stop control means, and the pseudo-game second ending means executes different processing depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

This gaming machine is configured to end the pseudo game even when a specific operation means is operated, and when the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo game, different processing is executed depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means was operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the circumstances under which the specific operation means was operated.

Gaming machine B3. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means ends the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means corresponding to the stop operation means that has not been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated, the simulated game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the images on the cyclical display means corresponding to the unoperated stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the pseudo-stopped results of the images in the simulated game to be unknown unless the stop operation means is operated, making it possible to encourage the player to operate the stop operation means in the simulated game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the cyclical display means that cyclically displays the images can be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from pseudo-game to game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B4. The gaming machine B3 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that a pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused as to whether the game is a pseudo game or a game related to the awarding of a bonus, even if the pseudo game can end without the circulating display of images stopping pseudo.

Gaming machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or B4 described above, if there are multiple circulating display means that pseudo-stop the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game, this gaming machine is characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main control device 101) that individually sets timing information (delay time) related to the timing at which the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of the symbols starts circulating the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if there are multiple circulating display means that pseudo-stop the circulating display of symbols in a pseudo game, timing information is individually set regarding when the circulating display means that pseudo-stopped the circulating display of symbols will start circulating the symbols. This configuration reduces the chances that the pseudo-stopped results of symbols in a pseudo game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming Machine B6. In the gaming machine B5, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by conducting a predetermined lottery.

With this gaming machine, timing information is set by conducting a predetermined lottery. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the time between the end of the simulated game and the start of the circulating display of images. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the results of the images stopping in the simulated game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in the game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B7. Any of gaming machines B3 to B6 described above, characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the cyclical display of the symbols for a predetermined time when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of the images will slow down for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player that the simulated game is ending by notifying them of the slowdown in the cyclical display speed of the images.

Gaming machine B8. Any of gaming machines B3 to B7 above, characterized in that the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means is equal to the cyclical display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means.

With this gaming machine, the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the pseudo game is equal to the speed at which images are cyclically displayed in the game related to the awarding of a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus in cases such as when a specific operating means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying images.

Gaming machine B9. In the gaming machine B2 described above, the pseudo-game second ending means is characterized by including specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed via step S1003 of the main control device 101) that controls the circulating display means that is circulating the images to pseudo-stop all circulating images when the specific operation means is operated while at least one of the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one stop operation means has been operated, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the images is controlled to pseudo-stop all cyclical display of images. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the cyclical game midway through the game without operating the stop operation means can do so by operating the specific operation means without operating the stop operation means.

Gaming machine B10. In the gaming machine B9, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in a different manner from when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific operation means is operated while at least one stop operation means has been operated, the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying the images will stop the cyclical display of the images in a manner different from when the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo game or the stop operation means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, allowing the player to choose which operation means to operate.

Gaming machine B11. The gaming machine B9 or B10 described above is characterized in that it is provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main control device 101) that individually sets timing information (delay time) related to the timing at which the circulating display means that has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the patterns will start circulating the patterns when all circulating display means have quasi-stopped the circulating display of the patterns in the quasi-game.

With this gaming machine, when all cyclical display means quasi-stop the cyclical display of symbols in a pseudo game, timing information is individually set regarding when the cyclical display means that quasi-stopped the cyclical display of symbols will start cyclical display of symbols. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the chances that the results of the quasi-stopped symbols in a pseudo game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B12. In the gaming machine B11, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by conducting a predetermined lottery.

With this gaming machine, timing information is set by conducting a predetermined lottery. This configuration makes it possible to randomize the time between the end of the simulated game and the start of the circulating display of the images. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the simulated stopping results of the images in the simulated game will aid in the operation of the stop operation means in the game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine B13. Any of gaming machines B2 to B12 above, wherein the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

In this gaming machine, the specific operation means is a different operation means from the start operation means and the stop operation means. This configuration reduces the chances of a player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if a player repeatedly presses the start operation means to start a game, this could result in the pseudo-game ending despite the player's intended enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine C1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means, the pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 have stopped) is configured to be executable.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the cyclical display of the patterns and the cyclical display of the patterns becomes constant speed;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101) is provided for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to stop the cyclic display of the pictures,
The bonus awarding means is configured to award the bonus based on a control result by the second stop control means,
The second stop control means controls the plurality of circulating display means so that, when the result of the lottery for the role is a prescribed result (a push order bell win), a prescribed win (a bell win) is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a prescribed operation method (an operation sequence that can achieve a bell win), and the prescribed win is not achieved when the stop operation means is operated in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method;
When the result of the lottery for the role is the specified result, an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of informing the specified operation method is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, it notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated, and when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is executed, it notifies the specified operation method after the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all the cyclical display of the pictures of the cyclical display means in the pseudo game and before the second start control means starts control to start the cyclical display of the pictures.

This gaming machine is configured so that when a prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed, the prescribed operation method is notified before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible for a player to operate the stop operation means after understanding the prescribed operation method in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed.

In addition, when the prescribed operation method is notified during a game in which a pseudo game is executed, the prescribed operation method is notified after the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means during the pseudo game and before the second start control means begins control to start the cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible to avoid operating the stop operation means using the prescribed operation method during a pseudo game, while also making it possible to avoid operating the stop operation means using an operation method different from the prescribed operation method during a game related to the awarding of a bonus after the pseudo game, which would result in the bonus being unavailable for the achievement of a prescribed win.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine C2. In the gaming machine C1 described above, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method after the cyclic display of all images on the cyclic display means has reached a constant speed.

With this gaming machine, when a prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not being executed, the prescribed operation method is notified after the cyclical display of all images on the cyclical display means has reached a constant speed and before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the timing of notification of the prescribed operation method in a game related to the awarding of a bonus between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, by ensuring that the prescribed operation method is notified before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, and by configuring the timing of notification of the prescribed operation method in a game related to the awarding of a bonus depending on whether a pseudo game is being executed, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Gaming machine C3. The gaming machine C1 or C2 described above further comprises: a prescribed determination means (winning role confirmation function S603 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the symbols on all cyclical display means; an announcement execution means (instruction monitor display function S604 of the main control unit 101) for causing the operation method announcement means to announce the prescribed operation method when the regulation determination means determines that the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result; and a time information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of the main control unit 101) for setting time information when the announcement execution means has caused the operation method announcement means to announce the prescribed operation method; and the second start control means controls the cyclical display of the symbols to start after a time corresponding to the time information set by the time information setting means has elapsed when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of the symbols on all cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images on all cyclical display means, it determines whether the result of the role lottery is a prescribed result, and when it determines that the result of the role lottery is a prescribed result, it causes the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, and when it has caused the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, it sets time information. Then, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images on all cyclical display means, the second start control means controls the start of cyclical display of images after a time corresponding to the time information has elapsed. With this configuration, when a prescribed operation method is to be announced after all cyclical display means have pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images in a pseudo game, it becomes possible to notify the prescribed operation method before the cyclical display of images begins.

Gaming machine C4. Any of the gaming machines C1 to C3 described above, further comprising at least the pseudo-game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, a main control means (main control device 101) that manages the game overall, and a secondary control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means, wherein the main control means controls the operation method notification means.

In this gaming machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means that oversees the game. This configuration reliably avoids the occurrence of an event where the operation method notification means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated before notifying the specified operation method.

Gaming machine C5. In any of gaming machines C1 to C4 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a second pseudo game termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols; when control is exercised by the second pseudo game termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means, and the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the pseudo-game can be ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players who find operating the stop operation means in a pseudo-game from becoming irritated and losing their motivation to play once the pseudo-game has begun.

Furthermore, if a specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means does not stop cyclically, and the quasi-game ends, and the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration allows for a swift transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus, while reducing the chances of operating the stop operation means in a game related to the awarding of a bonus using an operation method different from the specified operation method.

Gaming machine D1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When performing the pseudo game,
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means, the pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 have stopped) is configured to be executable.
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means (a pseudo game stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) is provided, which sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the role,
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means sets the second stop information during the execution of the pseudo game when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set while the pseudo game is being executed. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine D2. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine D1, further comprising a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of main control device 101) that determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images, and the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the time required for the stop operation determination means to determine the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo game, even when the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being executed.

Gaming machine D3. In the gaming machine D2 described above, the stop information setting means sets stop information such that a symbol attached to a predetermined specific position will pseudo-stop at a specified position, regardless of the timing of operation of the stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a predetermined symbol attached to a specific position to pseudo-stop at a specified position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. In this way, by configuring the pseudo-stop result of symbols in a pseudo game to be independent of the operation timing of the stop operation means, even in a configuration in which the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, it is possible to prevent a delay between the operation of the stop operation means and the pseudo-stop of the cyclical display of the symbol on the corresponding cyclical display means.

Gaming machine D4. A gaming machine as described above in gaming machine D2 or gaming machine D3, characterized in that the second stop control means is configured to control the cyclical display of the symbols to stop within a predetermined time period after the stop operation means is operated, and the pseudo-stop control means is configured to control the cyclical display of the symbols to pseudo-stop after the predetermined time period has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated.

According to this gaming machine, in games involving the awarding of bonuses, control is exercised to stop the cyclical display of images within a predetermined time period after the stop operation means is operated. Meanwhile, in pseudo-games, control can be exercised to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of images after a predetermined time period has elapsed after the stop operation means is operated. This configuration makes it possible to ensure time to set stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, and time to determine the stop position of the cyclical display means based on the stop information.

Gaming machine D5. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4 above, the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the symbols and before the pseudo stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images and before the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of the images. This configuration makes it possible to transition from the pseudo-game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus more quickly than a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game has ended.

Gaming machine D6. Any of the gaming machines D1 to D5 described above, further comprising a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the images, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration allows for a quicker transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

Gaming machine D7. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6 above, the pseudo game execution means includes a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the quasi-game ends without causing the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means to stop. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the second start control means, making it possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine D9. In any of gaming machines D1 to D8 above, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without quasi-stopping the circulating display of the symbols by the circulating display means that is circulating the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine E1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
The pseudo game execution means
A start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the patterns;
A stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding circulating display means to pseudo stop the circulating display of the picture;
a pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo game when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means,
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) is provided, which sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the role,
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, the stop information setting means sets the stop information in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, and the second stop information setting means sets the second stop information in a second memory area different from the first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means begins to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set in a second memory area different from the first memory area before the stop operation determination means begins to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated. This configuration makes it possible to transition from the pseudo game to the game related to the awarding of a bonus more quickly than a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine E2. In the gaming machine E1 described above, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result.

In this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets specific second stop information as stop information, which is set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result. This configuration makes it possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

Gaming machine E3. In the gaming machine E1 or E2 described above, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in the first memory area after the start control means starts control of the multiple cyclic display means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area after the cyclical display of images in the pseudo game has begun. This configuration makes it possible to quickly start the cyclical display of images when executing the pseudo game.

Gaming machine E4. In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the quasi-game ends without causing the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means to stop. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the second start control means, making it possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine E5. In any of gaming machines E1 to E4 above, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has cyclically stopped the display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without cyclically stopping the display of the symbols by the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one cyclical display means has pseudo-stopped the cyclical display of images, the cyclical game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of images by the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images. This configuration allows the cyclical display means that is currently cyclically displaying images to be controlled by the second stop control means without first being controlled by the second start control means. This makes it possible to quickly transition from the cyclical game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it will take time to set the second stop information, which could potentially prevent a swift transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus. However, if the second stop information is set while the pseudo game is being played, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine F1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
A bonus awarding means (such as the medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been selected in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (a pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (a winning of an additional lottery, a winning of a pseudo game lottery) is established,
When the pseudo game is performed, a start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) controls the plurality of circulating display means to start circulating display of the images;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the cyclical display of the patterns, a pseudo stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the corresponding cyclical display means to pseudo stop the cyclical display of the patterns;
A pseudo game ending means (a transition preparation processing function S412 after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) for ending the pseudo game when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped all of the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means;
A second start control means (an acceleration start processing function S607 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 in the main control device 101) for controlling the circulating display means that has not started the circulating display of the patterns to start the circulating display of the patterns when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circulating display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game;
A second stop control means (a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106 of the main control device 101 in this game) controls the corresponding circulating display means to stop the circulating display of the patterns when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circulating display of the patterns;
A stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo game stop information) used when the pseudo stop control means controls;
A second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
a stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function and a stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is executing the cyclic display of the images has been operated;
A gaming machine characterized in that the bonus awarding means awards the bonus based on the control result by the second stop control means, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in a first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the second stop information in the first memory area between the end of the pseudo game and before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether or not the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to the awarding of a bonus is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated, and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus is set in the first memory area after the pseudo game ends and before the stop operation determination means starts to determine whether the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, in the pseudo game, the stop information can be used to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of images, and in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, the second stop information can be used to stop the cyclical display of images.

Furthermore, by configuring the second stop information to be set in the first storage area where the stop information is stored, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity that needs to be prepared from increasing.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine F2. In the gaming machine F1 described above, the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first memory area with the second stop information.

With this gaming machine, when the simulated game ends, the stop information set in the first memory area is rewritten with the second stop information. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the first memory area from becoming too large.

Gaming machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or F2 described above, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result.

In this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets specific second stop information as stop information, which is set by the second stop information setting means when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a specific result. This configuration makes it possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to the awarding of a bonus, thereby reducing the amount of data that needs to be prepared in advance.

Gaming machine F4. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3 above, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, sets the stop information in the first memory area after the start control means starts control of the multiple cyclic display means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first memory area after the cyclical display of images in the pseudo game has begun. This configuration makes it possible to quickly start the cyclical display of images when executing the pseudo game.

Gaming machine F5. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4 above, the pseudo game execution means is equipped with a pseudo game second termination means (a pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control unit 101) that terminates the pseudo game when a specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulating display means are circulating the symbols, and when control is exercised by the pseudo game second termination means, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols on the circulating display means.

With this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclical display means are cyclically displaying images, the cyclical display of images on the cyclical display means will not cyclically stop, and the quasi-game will end. This configuration allows control by the second stop control means to be performed without going through control by the quasi-stop control means or the second start control means. It is then possible to set the second stop information by utilizing the time required for control by the quasi-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the quasi-game has ended, it is possible to quickly transition from the quasi-game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

Gaming machine F6. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the pseudo game execution means is characterized by including a third pseudo game termination means that, when a specific operation means (adjustment switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means has quasi-stopped the circulating display of the symbols, terminates the pseudo game without quasi-stopping the circulating display of the symbols by the circulating display means that is circulating the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific operation means is operated while at least one circulating display means has pseudo-stopped the circulating display of images, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of images by the circulating display means that is currently circulating images. This configuration allows the second stop control means to control at least the circulating display means that is currently circulating images without going through control by the pseudo stop control means or second start control means. It is then possible to set the second stop information by utilizing the time that would have been required for control by the pseudo stop control means or second start control means, which is no longer necessary. As a result, even when the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo game has ended, it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to a game related to the awarding of a bonus.

The gaming machines A to C may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines D to F may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A to C, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine G1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the image has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated, a stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of the main control device 101) determines the stop position of the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means;
a stop means (stepping motor control process S106 of the main control device 101) for stopping the circulating display of the patterns by the circulating display means for circulating the patterns when the circulating display means for circulating the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means;
The stop operation determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated during the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until when the stop means stops the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns,
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a standby processing execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of main control unit 101) that performs standby processing to wait for a predetermined time (100 msec) based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulating display means.

This gaming machine determines whether a stop operation means corresponding to a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated, and if the stop operation means has been operated, determines the stop position of the corresponding cyclical display means. Then, when the cyclical display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the cyclical display of symbols is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means is configured to determine whether a stop operation means corresponding to another cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated between the time the stop position determination means determines the stop position and the time the stop means stops the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols. This configuration allows a player to operate another stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that corresponds to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, improving the operability of the stop operation means can increase the enjoyment of the game.

However, if the system were configured to determine whether other stop operation means have been operated without waiting for the cyclical display of images to have stopped, new problems could arise, such as allowing the next round of play to begin before the cyclical display of images has stopped. Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to perform a standby process that waits for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means. This configuration makes it possible for all cyclical display of images to have stopped while the standby process is being performed, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine G2. The gaming machine G1 described above is further equipped with a stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main control device 101) that determines whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

This gaming machine is equipped with a stop position determination means that determines whether all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing, and even when a standby process is performed, it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being too long.

Gaming machine G3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine G2, characterized in that the stop position determination means is configured to determine, as the stop position, a position different from the cyclic display position of the cyclic display means when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

With this gaming machine, the cyclical display of images may not stop immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, the time between when the stop operation means is operated and when the cyclical display of the images on the corresponding cyclical display means stops varies. Therefore, if the standby process is configured to take this time into account, there is a concern that it may take a long time before the next round of play can begin. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine G2, it is possible to set the standby time in the standby process without considering the time required for the cyclical display means to reach the stop position, thereby effectively alleviating the above concern.

Gaming machine G4. A gaming machine comprising: a second stop operation determination means (main control device 101 operation completion confirmation function S2206) for determining whether or not all of the stop operation means have been operated when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means; and a standby process execution means for performing the standby process after the second stop operation determination means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, a second stop operation determination means is provided for determining whether all of the stop operation means have been operated, and the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the second stop operation determination means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated. This configuration makes it possible to standardize the time required until the next game round can be started, even when a standby process is performed, thereby improving operability when starting the next game round. For example, it is possible to perform standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, without providing a second stop operation determination means. However, with this configuration, the time required until the next game round can be started will vary depending on whether the player has completed operation of all of the stop operation means after the standby process has ended or during the standby process. Furthermore, if the time required until the next round can be started changes, an event may occur in which the player's operation to start the next round is not accepted, reducing operability when starting the next round.

Gaming machine G5. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G4 described above, wherein the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the bonus awarding means awards the bonus.

With this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the bonus awarding means awards a bonus. This configuration makes it possible to avoid situations where a bonus is awarded when the cyclical display of images has not stopped.

Gaming machine G6. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G5 described above is equipped with a winning determination means (a payout determination processing function of the main control unit 101) that determines whether a winning combination corresponding to the winning combination obtained in the lottery for the winning combination has been achieved, and the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the winning determination means makes the winning determination.

In this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the winning determination means performs a winning determination. This configuration prevents the processing configuration from becoming too complicated, and makes it possible to create a situation in which all cyclical display of images stops while the standby process is being performed.

Gaming machine G7. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6 described above, this gaming machine is characterized by comprising: stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of the main control device 101) that controls the multiple cyclic display means so that, if the result of the lottery for the role is a prescribed result (push order bell win), a prescribed win (bell win) is achieved when the stop operation means is operated in a prescribed operation method (an operation sequence that can achieve a bell win), and the prescribed win is not achieved if the stop operation means is operated in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method; and operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) that can notify the user of the prescribed operation method when the result of the lottery for the role is the prescribed result.

With this gaming machine, if the result of the lottery for a winning combination is a prescribed result, the prescribed operation method may be announced by the operation method announcement means. If the stop operation means is operated in the prescribed operation method at this time, a prescribed win can be achieved. By applying the configuration of any of the gaming machines G1 to G6 described above to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances that a player will unintentionally operate the stop operation means in a manner other than the prescribed operation method.

Gaming machine G8. The gaming machine G7 described above further comprises a notification control means (main control device 101) for controlling the operation method notification means, wherein when the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the specified operation method, the notification control means terminates the notification by the operation method notification means after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the notification control means has terminated the notification by the operation method notification means.

In this gaming machine, when the operation method notification means notifies a specified operation method, the stop position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, after which the notification by the operation method notification means ends, and then standby processing is performed. This configuration makes it possible to quickly end the notification by the operation method notification means while shortening the waiting time during standby processing.

Gaming machine G9. Any of the gaming machines G1 to G8 described above, comprising normal processing execution means (main control unit 101) that starts up when the power is turned on and repeatedly performs a series of normal processing, and interrupt processing execution means (main control unit 101) that periodically interrupts the normal processing to perform interrupt processing, wherein the normal processing execution means comprises the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby processing execution means, and the interrupt processing execution means comprises the stop means, and wherein the normal processing execution means is not equipped with means for determining whether the predetermined cyclical display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means when the stop position determination means has determined a stop position for a predetermined cyclical display means in a situation where the stop position determination means has not determined stop positions for multiple cyclical display means.

This gaming machine starts up when the power is turned on and performs normal processing repeatedly. This processing determines whether the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means cyclically displaying the images has been operated, and if the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclical display means cyclically displaying the images has been operated, determines the stop position of the cyclical display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means. Meanwhile, in normal processing, if the stop position determination means determines the stop position of a specific cyclical display means when the stop position determination means has not yet determined the stop positions of multiple cyclical display means, no determination is made as to whether the specific cyclical display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration allows the player to operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of the images of the cyclical display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Gaming machine G10. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, the circulating display means comprises a rotating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that rotates in a circumferential direction and has multiple types of images applied to it in the circumferential direction, and a drive means (stepping motor) that drives the rotating body.

In this gaming machine, the circulating display means comprises a rotating body that rotates in a circumferential direction and has multiple types of pictures applied to it in that circumferential direction, and a drive means for driving the rotating body. In this configuration, when the drive means is stopped, it is possible that the rotating body will continue to swing without immediately ending its rotation. However, if the machine is configured to perform a standby process that waits for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to end the swinging of the rotating body while the standby process is being performed.

Gaming machine H1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the master control means,
The main control means
A stop operation determination means (a stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means that is cyclically displaying the image has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated, a stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of the main control device 101) determines the stop position of the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means;
a stop means (stepping motor control process S106 of the main control device 101) for stopping the circulating display of the patterns by the circulating display means for circulating the patterns when the circulating display means for circulating the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means;
The stop operation determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulating display means that is circulating the patterns has been operated during the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until when the stop means stops the circulating display of the patterns of the circulating display means that is circulating the patterns,
a stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not all of the plurality of cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclical display means;
a first transmitting means (an all reels stop completion command transmitting function S2205 of the main control device 101) for transmitting first information (an all reels stop completion command) indicating the determination result of the stop position determining means to the slave control means when the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means;
a second stop operation determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transmission means (operation end command transmission function S2207 of the main control unit 101) that transmits second information (operation end command) indicating the judgment result of the second stop operation judgment means to the slave control means when the second stop operation judgment means determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated.

This gaming machine determines whether a stop operation means corresponding to a cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated, and if the stop operation means has been operated, determines the stop position of the corresponding cyclical display means. Then, when the cyclical display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the cyclical display of symbols is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means is configured to determine whether a stop operation means corresponding to another cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols has been operated between the time the stop position determination means determines the stop position and the time the stop means stops the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that is cyclically displaying symbols. This configuration allows a player to operate another stop operation means without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that corresponds to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, improving the operability of the stop operation means can increase the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation determination of other stop operation means is made without waiting for the cyclical display of the symbols to have stopped, new problems may arise, such as the cyclical display of symbols of the cyclical display means that determined the second stop position not having finished even though all stop operation means have finished operating, or the cyclical display of symbols of all cyclical display means having finished operating but at least one stop operation means not having finished operating. If such problems arise, problems will arise in the control performed by the slave control means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the master control means is configured such that, after the stop position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means, it determines whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and if it determines that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, it transmits first information indicating the determination result to the slave control means. Furthermore, after the stop position determination means on the master control means determines the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclic display means, it determines whether the stop operation means has been operated, and if it determines that none of the stop operation means have been operated, it transmits second information indicating the determination result to the slave control means. With this configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the cyclic display status of the images by receiving the first information, and can perform control according to the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine H2. In the gaming machine H1 described above, the second transmission means transmits the second information after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

In this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted. This configuration allows the slave control means to perform control in response to all of the multiple cyclical display means reaching the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and then to perform control in response to the completion of all operation of the stop operation means. Furthermore, because the main control means includes the stop position determination means, the maximum time required from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position until the cyclical display means actually reaches the stop position can be determined or predicted by the main control means. On the other hand, the time required for all of the stop operation means to reach a state where they are not being operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be determined or predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by configuring the second information to be transmitted after the first information is transmitted, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between, for example, the timing when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the receipt of the first information.

Gaming machine H3. In the gaming machine H2 described above, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration and prevents increases in memory capacity.

Gaming machine H4. In the gaming machine H3 described above, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information. This configuration enables the slave control means to quickly recognize that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, thereby reducing the discrepancy between the timing when all of the multiple cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information.

Gaming machine H5. In any of gaming machines H2 to H4 above, the secondary control means is characterized in that it includes an effect control means (additional lottery winning function of the display control device 81) that controls the auxiliary effect means (speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) to execute different auxiliary effects (additional notification effects) when a specific condition (additional lottery win) is met, when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying the images, and when all of the stop operation means have finished operating.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the slave control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute different auxiliary effects when all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols and when all of the stop operation means have been operated. In this configuration, depending on whether all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols or all of the stop operation means have been operated first, problems may arise, such as being unable to execute one of the carefully prepared auxiliary effects or complicating the processing configuration of the effect control means and increasing memory capacity. However, by configuring the master control means to transmit first information indicating that all of the multiple cyclical display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means and second information indicating that none of the stop operation means have been operated, the slave control means can determine that all of the multiple cyclical display means have finished cyclically displaying symbols by receiving the first information, and can determine that all of the stop operation means have been operated by receiving the second information. Furthermore, because the master control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the slave control means can control the execution of a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then control the execution of an auxiliary effect different from the predetermined auxiliary effect based on the subsequent reception of the second information. This makes it possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming Machine H6. In the gaming machine H5 described above, the effect control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a first auxiliary effect (third notification sound) when the first information is received, and controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a second auxiliary effect (announcement of the number of additional coins) when the second information is received, when the specific condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when a specific condition is met, the first auxiliary effect is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary effect is executed when the second information is received. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which one of the carefully prepared first and second auxiliary effects cannot be executed.

Gaming machine H7. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine H6, characterized in that the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices.

With this gaming machine, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices. This configuration makes it possible to reliably execute the first auxiliary effect even if the interval between receiving the first information and receiving the second information is short.

Gaming machine H8. In any of gaming machines H1 to H7 above, the main control means is equipped with a standby process execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of the main control device 101) that performs standby process of waiting for a predetermined time (100 msec) based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclical display means, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclical display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means.

With this gaming machine, a standby process is performed in which the machine waits for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the multiple cyclical display means. This configuration makes it possible for all cyclical display of symbols to stop while the standby process is being performed, thereby avoiding new problems such as the next game being able to start when the cyclical display of symbols has not stopped.

In addition, the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the multiple cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing, and even when standby processing is performed, it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being prolonged.

Gaming Machine H9. In the gaming machine H8 described above, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process execution means performs standby processing after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the lag between the timing when all of the multiple cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying images and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information, as well as the lag between the timing when the player has finished operating the stop operation means and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the second information. Furthermore, since the standby time can be set taking into account the time required to transmit the first information, it is possible to shorten the standby time during standby processing.

The gaming machines G group and H group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines G group and H group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through F group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine I1. A main control means (main control device 101) for managing the game,
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
A specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (such as rotation start header information);
A storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing different information depending on whether the game is a specific game (pseudo game) or not;
a command transmission means (command transmission process 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
A command creation means for creating the command (a header creation function S3002, a body creation function S3005, a footer creation function S3006, etc.) is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the command creation means is equipped with a specified command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a memory area that stores information that differs depending on whether the game is a specific game. This configuration allows the slave control means to determine whether the game is a specific game through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible for the secondary control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific game is being played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to pre-store commands to send when a specific game is being played and commands to send when a specific game is not being played, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which commands to be sent for specific games and commands to be sent for non-specific games are stored in advance, it becomes necessary to perform a process to determine whether or not the game is a specific game when sending a command, which complicates the processing configuration. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, once a specified command is created, the specified command will include information on whether or not the game is a specific game, making the above processing unnecessary. From this perspective, simplifying the processing configuration also makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine I2. In the gaming machine I1 described above, the specified command creation means creates a specified command by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, whether the specific game is being played or not.

With this gaming machine, a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, regardless of whether the game is a specific game or not. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the game is a specific game when sending a command, simplifying the processing configuration and reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine I3. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine I1 or I2, characterized in that the specified command is a header.

With this gaming machine, a header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration makes it possible to include information in the header indicating whether or not the game is specific. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming Machine I4. A gaming machine similar to the above gaming machine I3, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming Machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or I4 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific game storage bit that stores information indicating whether or not it is the specific game, and the specific game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

In this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is a specific game. The specific game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether it is a specific game in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming Machine I6. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine I5, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the specific game storage bit are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

Gaming Machine I7. Any of the above gaming machines I3 to I6, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating the command type.

With this gaming machine, a header containing information indicating whether or not a specific game is being played is created by calculating header information containing information indicating the command type and information stored in a memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the headers of commands to be sent when a specific game is being played and the headers of commands to be sent when a non-specific game is being played, thereby reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine I8. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I7, comprising: first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing first information (40H) in the memory area when a first specific condition (win in the additional lottery, win in the pseudo game lottery) is met; second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) for changing the information stored in the memory area to second information (00H) when a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is met after the first specific condition is met; confirmation means (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.) for confirming the information stored in the memory area; and specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the specific game when the confirmation means confirms that the first information has been stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, when a first specific condition is met, first information is stored in the memory area, and when a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to second information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area, a specific game is executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only when creating a specified command but also when determining whether or not to execute a specific game, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming Machine I9. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I8 is configured such that when information indicating the specific game is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when information indicating that the game is not the specific game is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if information indicating a specific game is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and if information indicating a non-specific game is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the information stored in the memory area both the function of information used when creating a specified command and the function of information used when outputting a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in storage capacity.

Gaming Machine I10. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific game is a pseudo-game.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means determine whether or not a game is being played through a specified command.

Gaming Machine I11. Any of the above gaming machines I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific game is a game in a specific game state.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means determine whether or not a game is being played in a specific gaming state through a specified command.

Gaming machine J1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
A first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing first information (40H) in a memory area (pseudo game flag storage area) when a first specific condition (winning the additional lottery or winning the pseudo game lottery) is established;
When a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is established after the first specific condition is established, a second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) changes the information stored in the memory area to second information (00H);
A confirmation means (such as a pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903) for confirming the information stored in the storage area;
a control execution means (pseudo game execution function) that executes different controls when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a setting means for setting corresponding information (rotation start header) using at least a portion of the information stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, when a first specific condition is met, first information is stored in the memory area, and when a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to second information. Different controls are executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area. Furthermore, corresponding information is set using at least a portion of the information stored in the memory area. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only for determining when control is executed but also for setting corresponding information, it is possible to prevent an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine J2. In the gaming machine J1 described above, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the memory area, and does not execute the specific game when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, if it is confirmed that first information is stored in the memory area, a specific game is executed, and if the confirmation means confirms that second information is stored in the memory area, the specific game is not executed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether or not a specific game will be executed based on the information stored in the memory area, and to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not a specific game will be executed.

Gaming machine J3. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine J1 or J2, further comprising: specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (such as spin start header information); and command transmission means (such as command transmission process 3) for transmitting commands to the slave control means, wherein the setting means comprises specified command creation means (such as header creation function S3002) for creating specified commands (such as stop headers) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, a specified command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a memory area that stores information that differs depending on whether the first and second specific conditions are met. This configuration allows the slave control means to determine whether each specific condition is met through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible for the secondary control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to pre-store the commands to be sent when the first information is stored and the commands to be sent when the second information is stored, which makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the command to be sent when first information is stored and the command to be sent when second information is stored are stored in advance, a confirmation process using a confirmation means is required when a command is sent, complicating the processing configuration. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, once a specified command is created, the specified command will include whether first information or second information is stored, making the above confirmation process unnecessary. From this perspective, simplifying the processing configuration also makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine J4. In the gaming machine J3 described above, the specified command creation means creates a specified command by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area, whether the first information is stored in the memory area or the second information is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, whether the first information or the second information is stored in the memory area, a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the memory area when sending a command, simplifying the processing configuration and making it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine J5. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine J3 or J4, characterized in that the specified command is a header.

With this gaming machine, a header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the memory area. This configuration makes it possible to include information in the header indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine J6. The gaming machine described above in relation to gaming machine J5, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or J6 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met, and the specific condition storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

According to this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether the first and second specific conditions are met. The specific condition storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether each specific condition is met in bits that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine J8. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine J7, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the specific condition storage bit are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating specific information and the information stored in the memory area.

Gaming machine J9. Any of the gaming machines J5 to J8 above, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating the command type.

This gaming machine creates a header containing information indicating whether each specific condition is met by calculating header information containing information indicating the command type and information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to pre-store the header to be sent when the first information is stored and the header to be sent when the second information is stored, thereby reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine J10. In any of the gaming machines J1 to J9 above, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the first information is stored in the memory area, and does not output the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the second information is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, when first information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when second information is stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output outside the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the information stored in the memory area both the function of information used when executing control and the function of information used when outputting the first signal outside the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine K1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means,
The main control means
a command transmission means (command transmission process 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
an information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing first command information (stop header information, etc.) to be transmitted to the slave control means in the case of a first game (main game);
When a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game is executed, a memory area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by having a command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information in the case of the second game.

With this gaming machine, first command information to be sent to the slave control means when the first game is being played is pre-stored, and when a second game different from the first game is being played, second game information is stored in the memory area. Then, when the second game is being played, second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. This configuration makes it possible to send second command information to the slave control means when the second game is being played, and enables the slave control means to perform control appropriate for either the first game or the second game.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Furthermore, with this configuration, there is no need to store second command information in the main control means in advance, which reduces the amount of data and prevents an increase in storage capacity.

Gaming machine K2. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K1, but configured such that when the first game is executed, first game information (00H) is stored in the memory area.

With this gaming machine, when the first game is executed, first game information is stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to provide a separate memory area for storing first game information, making it possible to prevent an increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K3. A gaming machine comprising the above-mentioned gaming machine K2, including: first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing the second game information in the memory area when a first specific condition (winning the additional lottery, winning the pseudo game lottery) is met; second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611) for changing the information stored in the memory area to the first game information when a second specific condition (end of pseudo game) is met after the first specific condition is met; confirmation means (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.) for confirming the information stored in the memory area; first game execution means (main game execution function) for executing the first game when the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the memory area; and second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the second game when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the memory area.

According to this gaming machine, if a first specific condition is met, second game information is stored in the memory area, and if a second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the memory area is changed to first game information. If the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the memory area, the first game is executed, and if the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the memory area, the second game is executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the memory area to be used not only when creating second command information but also when determining whether to execute the first game or the second game, it is possible to prevent an increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K4. In the gaming machine K2 or K3 described above, the command creation means creates command information by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the memory area, in both the first game and the second game.

With this gaming machine, in both the first game and the second game, command information is created by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the memory area. This configuration eliminates the need to determine whether a command is being sent for the first game or the second game, simplifying the processing configuration and reducing the amount of data.

Gaming machine K5. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K4, characterized in that when the command creation means calculates the first command information and the first gaming information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information.

With this gaming machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the calculation result remains the first command information. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration and makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Gaming machine K6. Any of the gaming machines K1 to K5 above, characterized in that the first command information is a header.

With this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as a header, and to include information in the header indicating whether it is the first game or the second game. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundancy in the commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine K7. The gaming machine described above as K6, characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

With this gaming machine, the header contains information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game, and the header is contained in one byte, allowing the slave control means to grasp more information when it receives the header.

Gaming machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or K7 described above, the header is configured to include a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game, and the game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit.

According to this gaming machine, the header has a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and a game storage bit that stores information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game. The game storage bit is located lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. This configuration makes it possible to store information indicating whether it is the first game or the second game in a bit that would previously have been unused, making it possible to effectively prevent redundancy in commands sent from the master control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine K9. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine K8, characterized in that the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area.

In this gaming machine, the memory area is configured with the same bytes as the header, and all areas other than those corresponding to the game storage bits are unused. This configuration makes it possible to avoid changes to information indicating the command type when creating a header by calculating the first command information and the second game information.

Gaming machine K10. Any of the gaming machines K1 to K9 described above is configured such that when the second gaming information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when the second gaming information is not stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when second gaming information is stored in the memory area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when second gaming information is not stored in the memory area, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine. This configuration makes it possible to give the second gaming information both the function of information used when creating second command information and the function of information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the memory area and prevent the increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine K11. Any of the above gaming machines K1 to K10, characterized in that the second game is a pseudo game and the first game is a game that is not a pseudo game.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means can determine whether or not a pseudo game is being played through the first command information and second command information.

Gaming machine K12. Any of the above gaming machines K1 to K10, wherein the second game is a game in a specific gaming state, and the first game is a game in a gaming state different from the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means can determine whether or not a game is being played in a specific gaming state through the first command information and second command information.

The gaming machines I through K may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines I through K may also be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A through H, and the above-mentioned effects can still be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine L1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (a menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first performance is executed, the specified operation becomes valid if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is met after the start of the specific performance, and the specified operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific performance.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the specified operation may become effective if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific effect, or may become effective even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine L2. A gaming machine similar to the above gaming machine L1, characterized in that the specific condition includes the passage of a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) from the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation may become effective after a specific time has elapsed since the start of the specific effect, or before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the specific effect. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

Gaming machine L3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine L2, but configured such that the specific effect notifies the specific result (whether or not an additional bonus is awarded) within a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) that is shorter than the specific time.

With this gaming machine, during a special effect, a special result is announced within the second special time, which is shorter than the special time. This configuration reduces the chances that a specific operation will be effective before the special result is announced.

Gaming machine L4. In the gaming machine L3 described above, if a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is met after the start of the specific effect, the predetermined operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met, and the second specific condition includes the elapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, if a second specific condition is met, including the passage of a second specific time since the start of a specific effect, the specified operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not met. This configuration makes it possible to make the specified operation valid after the specific result is notified, whether the specified operation becomes valid because the specific condition is met or because the second specific condition is met.

Gaming machine L5. A gaming machine in accordance with the above gaming machine L3 or L4, characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

In this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first effect is executed, but also when the specified information is displayed. In a configuration in which the specific effect is initiated in response to operation of the first operating means, it is possible that the player will operate the first operating means again after the specific result is announced, hoping for further development of the effect. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to announce the specific result before the second specific time, which is shorter than the specific time, has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specified information being displayed in a situation unintended by the player.

Gaming machine L6. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine L5, characterized in that the specific time is at least twice the second specific time.

With this gaming machine, the specific time is set to be at least twice the second specific time, so if the player operates the first operating means again after the specific result has been announced in the hope of further development of the performance, it is possible to avoid the specific information being displayed.

Gaming machine L7. In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6 described above, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid if the time elapsed since the specified condition (received operation end command) is met reaches a first specified time (approximately 10 seconds) and the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a second specified time (approximately 2 seconds), or if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a third specified time (approximately 5 seconds) that is longer than the second specified time; if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time after the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time, or if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, and the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time, or if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches a third specified time that is longer than the second specified time, the predetermined operation becomes effective; if the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time and the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, or if the time elapsed since the specified condition is met reaches the first specified time, the predetermined operation becomes effective. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on when the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time.

Gaming machine L8. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine L7, characterized in that the specified condition is met when the first effect is initiated.

With this gaming machine, the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective changes depending on the relationship between the time elapsed since the start of the first effect and the timing at which the time elapsed since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time. Because the specific effect is initiated by operating the first operating means, this configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective depending on the time it takes for the player to operate the first operating means after the start of the first effect.

Gaming machine LL1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is met after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific performance.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring where the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the machine may transition to a customer waiting state if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific effect, or may transition to a customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not met after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing of the transition to a customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configurations described above for gaming machines L2 to L8 may be combined as appropriate by changing the description "a specified operation becomes effective" to "the machine transitions to a customer waiting state." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine M1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
the master control means includes a specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first performance control means (press display execution function S3504) that controls execution of a first performance (press display) that prompts operation of the first operating means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) for controlling execution of a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) that controls the display of predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized by having an enabling means (a function that terminates the press-down effect processing and proceeds to S3603) that, when the first effect is executed, makes the subsequent specified operation valid if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid. This makes it possible to determine the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid based on the timing at which the specific command sent from the main control means is received.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine M2. In the gaming machine M1 described above, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent predetermined operation after the specific effect has been executed.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M3. In the gaming machine M1 or M2 described above, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent specified operation after a predetermined specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific effect was executed.

With this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation becomes valid a predetermined time after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command is received. Furthermore, by providing a grace period of a specified time between the execution of the specific effect and the specified operation becoming valid, it is possible to change the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operating means is operated, and the timing at which the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M4. Any of the gaming machines M1 to M3 described above, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

In this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first effect is executed, but also when the specified information is to be displayed. In a configuration in which the start of a specific effect is triggered by the operation of the first operating means, it is conceivable that the player may operate the first operating means again after the specific effect has been executed, hoping for further development of the effect. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the specified operation becomes effective not when the specific effect has been executed, but when a specific command is received or after a specified time has passed, it is possible to reduce the chances of the specified information being displayed in a situation unintended by the player.

Amusement machine M5. The gaming machine M4 includes a plurality of cyclical display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that cyclically display a plurality of patterns (designs), a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56-58) that is operated to start the cyclical display of the patterns, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control unit 101) that draws winning combinations, a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42-44) that are operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the patterns, and a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control unit 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination when a winning combination and a winning design corresponding to the winning combination selected in the winning combination drawing stop in a valid position (valid line) in a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor winning designs), and the predetermined information control means controls the display of the predetermined information when at least all of the cyclical display means have stopped the cyclical display of the patterns.

This gaming machine can achieve the above-mentioned effects in a slot machine that can display predetermined information even when play has not yet begun.

Gaming machine M6. In the gaming machine M5 described above, the main control means is equipped with an operation end command sending means (operation end command sending function S3307) that sends an operation end command to the slave control means when all operations of the stop operation means performed to stop the cyclical display of the images have been completed, and the first effect control means controls the execution of the first effect based on the reception of the operation end command.

With this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed. In this configuration, when the first operation means is operated, control is either performed to execute a specific effect or to display specified information. Therefore, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the configuration is such that when the first effect is executed, subsequent specified operations are valid, making it possible to avoid malfunctions.

Gaming machine M7. In the gaming machine M6 described above, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of the images have been completed.

With this gaming machine, a specific command is sent when a predetermined time has elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which a specific operation becomes effective depending on the time elapsed since all operations of the stop operation means to stop the cyclical display of images have been completed, and the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operation means is operated.

Gaming machine M8. In the gaming machine M5 described above, the main control means is equipped with a circulation end command sending means (all reels stopped command sending function S3305) that sends a circulation end command to the slave control means when all of the circulation display means have stopped the cyclical display of the symbols, and the first effect control means controls the execution of the first effect based on the reception of the circulation end command.

With this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all cyclical display of images has stopped. In this configuration, when the first operating means is operated, control is either performed to execute a specific effect or to display specified information. Therefore, if the first effect is executed and the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent specified operation is considered valid, thereby making it possible to avoid malfunctions.

Gaming machine M9. In the gaming machine M8 described above, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all of the cyclical display means stopped cyclical display of the images.

With this gaming machine, a specific command is sent when a predetermined time has elapsed since all cyclical display of symbols has stopped. This configuration makes it possible to change the timing at which a specific operation becomes effective depending on the time elapsed since all cyclical display of symbols has ended and the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, i.e., the timing at which the first operating means is operated.

Gaming machine MM1. A main control means (main control device 101) that controls and manages games;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in response to signals from the master control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
the master control means includes a specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first performance control means (press display execution function S3504) that controls execution of a first performance (press display) that prompts operation of the first operating means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) for controlling execution of a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition control means (standby processing function S3607) for controlling transition to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state);
A gaming machine characterized by having a transition enabling means (a function of terminating the press-down effect processing and transitioning to S3603) that enables transition to the customer waiting state after executing the first effect if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has already been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to transition to a customer waiting state afterwards. This means that the timing of transitioning to a customer waiting state can be determined by the timing of receiving the specific command sent from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine MM2. The gaming machine MM1 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with second transition enabling means (a function that terminates the press effect processing based on second timer 0 and transitions to S3603) that enables transition to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed if the specific effect has not already been executed when the specific command is received when the first effect is executed.

With this gaming machine, if the first effect has been executed and the specific command has not yet been received, the machine can transition to a customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. This configuration makes it possible to execute the specific effect even if the first operating means is operated after the specific command has been received.

The configurations described in gaming machines M3 to M9 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the phrase "the predetermined operation thereafter is made valid" to "the transition to the customer waiting state is made possible thereafter." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine N1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (a menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first effect is executed, there are cases in which the specified operation becomes effective based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific effect, and cases in which the specified operation becomes effective based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific effect.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to display the specified information by performing a specified operation even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of the specified information not being displayed even when the specified operation is performed, reducing the chances of players becoming frustrated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation may become effective based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, or based on the value of the second timer, which is activated after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for players to display specified information at the timing they desire, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine N2. The gaming machine N1 described above, further characterized by including an activation means (first timer activation function S3505) that activates the first timer when the first effect starts.

In this gaming machine, the first timer is activated when the first effect starts. This configuration makes it possible to configure the machine so that, when the first effect is executed, a predetermined operation is activated based on the time elapsed since the start of the first effect, or a predetermined operation is activated based on the time elapsed since the start of a specific effect.

Gaming machine N3. The gaming machine N1 or N2 described above, further comprising: a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0); and an execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether the specific effect has been executed; and a configuration in which the predetermined operation is enabled when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific effect has been executed.

With this gaming machine, if the value of the first timer reaches a specified value after a specific effect has been executed, a specific operation becomes valid. This configuration makes it possible, when the first effect is executed, to prompt the player to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, reducing the chance of a long delay between the first effect and the specific effect.

Gaming machine N4. A gaming machine similar to the above-mentioned gaming machine N3, characterized in that if the specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specified operation becomes effective when the value of the second timer reaches a second specified value (0).

With this gaming machine, if a specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, a specified operation becomes valid when the value of the second timer reaches a second specified value. With this configuration, if the first operating means is operated so that a specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the length of time from when the specific effect is executed until the specified operation becomes valid varies depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. However, if the first operating means is operated so that a specific effect has been executed after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the length of time from when the specific effect is executed until the specified operation becomes valid can be kept constant.

Gaming machine N5. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine N4, further comprising second activation means (second timer activation function S4212) that activates the second timer when the specific effect has been executed.

This gaming machine is configured to activate the second timer when a specific effect has been executed, making it possible to maintain a constant length of time between the execution of a specific effect and the activation of a specific operation.

Gaming machine N6. In the gaming machine N5 described above, the second activation means does not activate the second timer if the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, if a specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the second timer is not activated, but if a specific effect is executed after the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the second timer is activated. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second timer not to activate when a specific operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer not to activate when a specific operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine N7. Any of the gaming machines N3 to N6 described above, characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value. This configuration ensures that the second timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and that the first timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer.

Gaming machine N8. The gaming machine described above as gaming machine N1, characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating.

This gaming machine is designed so that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating, making it possible to change the timing at which a specified operation becomes effective while simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine N9. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine N8, further comprising: confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific effect has been executed; and second activation means for activating the second timer when the confirmation means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

With this gaming machine, when a specific effect has been executed, the value of the first timer is checked to see if it is equal to a specified value, and if so, the second timer is activated. This configuration allows the first timer to operate until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer can be activated when the specific effect has been executed.

Gaming machine N10. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine N9, characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

With this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches a specified value. This configuration ensures that the second timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and that the first timer does not operate when a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer.

Gaming machine NN1. A first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a first effect (press display) that prompts the user to operate the first operating means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the first effect is executed;
transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first effect is executed, there are cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific effect, and cases where the machine transitions to the customer waiting state based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific effect.

This gaming machine makes it possible to transition to a customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. This configuration reduces the chances of an event occurring in which the machine does not transition to a customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the machine may transition to a customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, or may transition to a customer waiting state based on the value of the second timer, which is activated after the start of the specific effect. This makes it possible to change the timing of the transition to the customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the machine to transition to a waiting state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configurations described above for gaming machines N2 to N10 may be combined as appropriate by changing the description "a specified operation becomes effective" to "the machine transitions to a customer waiting state." Even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The gaming machines L group through N group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines L group through N group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through K group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine O1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
When a first termination condition (a difference of 2400) is established, a first termination means (an advantageous period termination function S1703 to S1705 of the main control device 101) terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state;
When a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is established, a second termination means (advantageous period termination function S4505 to S4507 of the main control device 101) terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state;
A control means (display control device 81) for controlling the display of an end screen informing the user that the advantageous state will end,
The control means controls the display of the end screen in the game next to the game in which the first end condition was met when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, and controls the display of the end screen in the game in which the second end condition is met when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine O2. The gaming machine O1 described above is characterized in that the first termination condition is met when the difference in the number of gaming media from the base point at which the number of gaming media has been reduced the most during the advantageous state reaches an upper limit (2,400 coins).

With this gaming machine, if the difference in the number of coins from the base point at which gaming media have been reduced the most during an advantageous state reaches the upper limit, the end screen is displayed in the next play after the play in which the difference in the number of coins reaches the upper limit. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the end screen being displayed for multiple play times when the advantageous state has not yet ended. For example, it is possible to configure the end screen to be displayed in the play time in which the first end condition is met, but in this case, the play time in which the first end condition is met may differ depending on the results of the winning combination or the operation method of the stop operation means, which could result in the end screen being displayed for multiple play times when the advantageous state has not yet ended.

Gaming machine O3. The gaming machine O2 described above is equipped with a difference in number confirmation means (difference in number confirmation function S4511 of the main control unit 101) for confirming the difference in number of coins, and is configured so that if the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the number of coins has reached a specified number (2,200 coins) that is less than the upper limit, the first end condition is met in the subsequent game round, and the advantageous state ends.

With this gaming machine, if the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the number of coins has reached a specified number that is less than the upper limit, the first end condition is met in the subsequent play, and the advantageous state ends. This configuration allows the player to play in an advantageous state with the goal of the difference in number of coins reaching the specified number. As a result, even if an upper limit is set on the difference in number of coins in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to know in advance that the first end condition will be met and the advantageous state will end, making it possible to diversify the auxiliary effects that are displayed between the time the difference in number confirmation means confirms that the specified number has been reached and the time the first end condition is met.

Gaming machine O4. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a continuation auxiliary effect control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of the display control device 81) that controls the execution of a continuation auxiliary effect (ending video) that continues until the first game end condition is met, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of coins has been reached in the above gaming machine O3.

With this gaming machine, when the difference coin confirmation means confirms that the specified number of coins has been reached, a continuation support effect is executed, which continues until the first end condition is met in a game. This configuration makes it possible to notify the player through the continuation support effect that the first end condition has been met and the advantageous state has ended, and to allow the player to play while feeling a sense of superiority until the first end condition is actually met. Furthermore, because an end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the first end condition was met, the player can play the next game while still basking in the afterglow. As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine O5. Any of the gaming machines O1 to O4 described above, characterized in that when the termination condition for the second gaming mode is met, the second termination condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when the conditions for ending the second gaming mode are met and the advantageous state ends, an end screen is displayed in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second gaming mode are met. This configuration makes it possible for the player to operate the start operating means to start the next game round while building anticipation that the second gaming mode will continue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine O6. The gaming machine O5 described above is characterized in that, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the game in which the second end condition is met.

With this gaming machine, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the round in which the second end condition is met. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the end screen that has been painstakingly prepared from going to waste. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the round in question has ended, but in this case, if the player immediately operates the start operating means to start the next round in question, there would not be enough time to display the end screen.

Gaming machine O7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine O5 or O6 described above, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed even if at least one cyclic display means in the game in which the second end condition is met has not stopped cyclic display of the images.

With this gaming machine, when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed even if at least one of the cyclical display means for the game in which the second end condition is met has not stopped cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the carefully prepared end screen from going to waste. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after all cyclical display means have stopped cyclical display of images, but in this case, if the player immediately operates the start operation means to start the next game, there would not be enough time to display the end screen.

Gaming machine O8. Any of the gaming machines O5 to O7 described above, further comprising a count information storage means (transition game number counter) that stores count information relating to the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode, and wherein the condition for terminating the second gaming mode is met when the number of games corresponding to the count information has been played.

With this gaming machine, the condition for ending the second gaming mode is met when the number of plays corresponding to the number of plays stored in the number of plays information storage means has been played. This configuration makes it possible to avoid displaying the end screen for multiple games even when the second gaming mode and advantageous state have not yet ended.

Gaming machine O9. The gaming machine O8 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next game following the game that displayed the end screen.

With this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of plays available in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next game after the game in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operating means to start the next game while encouraging them to expect the second gaming mode to continue, thereby increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the game in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of plays available in the second gaming mode has increased. This can amplify the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery.

Gaming machine O10. Any of the gaming machines O1 to O9 described above, characterized in that when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, when switching from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, the end screen is displayed after the first game in the normal mode. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an ending screen is displayed on the first play in the normal state to notify that the advantageous state has ended.

With this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, an end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal mode to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P2. The gaming machine P1 described above is characterized in that it is equipped with transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and is configured to continue displaying the end screen until the game play in which the transition determination means determines to transition to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the end screen continues to be displayed during each game in normal mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in normal mode, thereby preventing an increase in memory capacity.

Gaming machine P3. The gaming machine P2 described above is characterized by being equipped with a game count notification means (a function of the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the number of games continued) that notifies the player of the number of games played in the first gaming mode.

In this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of plays played in the first gaming mode is reported. With this configuration, even if a game is played under normal conditions, it does not count as the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, and therefore the number of plays cannot be reported or updated under normal conditions. If the number of plays was not reported or updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the player will perceive playing under normal conditions as meaningless, and lose interest in playing. However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each play under normal conditions, it is possible to switch from the end screen to a report of the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, thereby reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine P4. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P3 described above, further comprising transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and wherein the transition determination means is configured so that the rate at which it determines to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the rate at which it is determined to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it is determined not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of times a game remains in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen during the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in memory capacity. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the number of times the end screen is continuously displayed for an extended period of time, thereby reducing the number of times a player ends play while the end screen is displayed.

Gaming machine P5. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P4 described above, wherein the end screen displays the difference in number of coins from when the gaming media was most reduced in the advantageous state until the advantageous state ended, and the difference in number displayed on the end screen does not reflect the game results in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of gaming media from when the number of gaming media was lowest during an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference in the number of gaming media displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game results during normal play. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of gaming media acquired by the player during an advantageous state, even when the end screen is displayed during normal play. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference in the number of gaming media displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine P6. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P5 described above, characterized in that it comprises transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, and advantageous information notification means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player if the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, if the game does not transition from normal mode to the first gaming mode, advantageous information that is beneficial to the player is notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing in normal mode.

Gaming machine P7. In the gaming machine P6 described above, the advantageous information notification means, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, notifies the advantageous information before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols, and does not notify the advantageous information after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols.

With this gaming machine, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, the advantageous information is announced before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images, and is no longer announced after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible for players who want to check the advantageous information to play in normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating in a reduced capacity due to the normal state.

Gaming machine P8. In the gaming machine P6 or P7, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

With this gaming machine, advantageous information is announced based on the number of times the normal state continues. This configuration can reduce the player's loss of motivation to play when the game does not transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of gaming machine P2, it can prevent gameplay in the normal state from becoming monotonous. While continuously displaying the end screen over multiple game plays can raise concerns that the game will become monotonous, this configuration can create expectations in the player that different advantageous information will be announced in the next game play, making it possible to focus the player's attention on the advantageous information.

Gaming machine P9. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P8 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of the end screen at the end of the game round in which the second game mode ends.

With this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round in which the second gaming mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to display the end screen across advantageous and normal states, reducing the chances that the player will realize that they are in the normal state.

Gaming machine P10. The gaming machine P9 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) in the second gaming mode to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next gaming session following the one that displayed the end screen.

With this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next play round following the one in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operation means to start the next play round when the end screen is displayed, while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the play round in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode has increased. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, if a specific player finishes play while the end screen is displayed, other players can be prompted to operate the start operation means to start the next play round while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode.

Amusement machine P11. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P8 described above includes first termination means (advantageous period termination functions S1703 to S1705 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first termination condition (a difference in number of coins of 2,400) is met; second termination means (advantageous period termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is met (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter); and control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of an end screen notifying players that the advantageous state will end; wherein the control means controls the display of the end screen in the game turn following the game turn in which the first termination condition was met when the first termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends; and controls the display of the end screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met when the second termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine Q1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that cyclically display a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player as a winning combination based on the winning combination that has been won in the lottery and the winning pattern that corresponds to the winning combination forming a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning patterns) at an effective position (effective line) and stopping,
The game state has an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) can be activated, and a normal state (normal section) in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function is activated more frequently than in the first game mode,
A transition determination means (a transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an advantageous information notification means (a function for displaying suggested jewels and confirmed jewels on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player when the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, if the game does not transition from normal mode to the first gaming mode, advantageous information that is beneficial to the player is notified. This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from avoiding playing in normal mode, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q2. In the gaming machine Q1 described above, the advantageous information notification means, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, notifies the advantageous information before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols, and does not notify the advantageous information after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of the symbols.

With this gaming machine, in a game turn in which the transition determination means determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, the advantageous information is announced before all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images, and is no longer announced after all of the multiple cyclical display means stop cyclical display of images. This configuration makes it possible for players who want to check the advantageous information to play in normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating in a reduced capacity due to the normal state.

Gaming machine Q3. In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2 described above, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

With this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the player's loss of motivation to play when the game does not transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

Gaming machine Q4. Any of the above gaming machines Q1 to Q3 is configured such that, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed during the first play in the normal state to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended.

With this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal mode, an end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal mode to notify the player that the advantageous state has ended. This configuration allows the player to play the first game in the normal mode while basking in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q5. The gaming machine described above in connection with gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition determination means determines that the game should transition to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed during each play in normal mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed in normal mode, thereby preventing increases in memory capacity. However, if the end screen is continuously displayed across multiple play times, there is a concern that play in normal mode may become monotonous. However, with a configuration that notifies advantageous information when the normal mode continues, it is possible to create expectations in the player that, for example, different advantageous information will be announced in the next play time, thereby drawing the player's attention to the advantageous information. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine Q6. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine Q5, but equipped with a game count notification means (a function of the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the number of games played) that notifies the player of the number of games played in the first gaming mode.

In this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of plays played in the first gaming mode is reported. With this configuration, even if a game is played under normal conditions, it does not count as the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, and therefore the number of plays cannot be reported or updated under normal conditions. If the number of plays was not reported or updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the player will perceive playing under normal conditions as meaningless, and lose interest in playing. However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each play under normal conditions, it is possible to switch from the end screen to a report of the number of plays played under the first gaming mode, thereby reducing the visual discomfort. As a result, the above concerns can be effectively resolved.

Gaming machine Q7. Any of the above gaming machines Q4 to Q6, characterized in that the ending screen displays the difference in the number of coins from when the number of gaming media was lowest in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state, and the difference in the number of coins displayed on the ending screen does not reflect the game results in the normal state.

With this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of gaming media from when the number of gaming media was lowest during an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference in the number of gaming media displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game results during normal play. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the player of the number of gaming media acquired by the player during an advantageous state, even when the end screen is displayed during normal play. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference in the number of gaming media displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine Q8. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7 above, characterized in that the transition determination means is configured so that the rate at which it determines to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it determines not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode.

With this gaming machine, the rate at which it is determined to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the rate at which it is determined not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of times a game remains in the normal state, preventing players from avoiding playing in the normal state. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine Q5, it is possible to reduce the number of times the end screen is displayed continuously for an extended period of time, thereby reducing the number of times a player ends play while the end screen is displayed.

Gaming machine Q9. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above, characterized in that it is equipped with an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of the end screen at the end of the game round in which the second game mode ends.

With this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round in which the second gaming mode ends. This configuration makes it possible to display the end screen across advantageous and normal states, reducing the chances that the player will realize that they are in the normal state.

Gaming machine Q10. The gaming machine Q9 described above is characterized by comprising: an increase lottery means (an increase lottery processing function S4403 of the main control unit 101) that conducts an increase lottery (an increase lottery) in the second gaming mode to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming mode; and a winning notification means (a revival effect on the auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player that the increase lottery has been won in the next gaming session following the one that displayed the ending screen.

With this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode, the player may be notified that they have won the increase lottery in the next play round following the one in which the end screen was displayed. This configuration allows the player to operate the start operation means to start the next play round when the end screen is displayed, while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, with this configuration, the player can view the end screen in the play round in which the end condition for the second gaming mode is met, and then be notified that the number of playable rounds in the second gaming mode has increased. This increases the player's sense of satisfaction at winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, if a specific player finishes play while the end screen is displayed, other players can be prompted to operate the start operation means to start the next play round while encouraging the player to anticipate the continuation of the second gaming mode.

Amusement machine Q11. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above includes first termination means (advantageous period termination functions S1703-S1705 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first termination condition (difference in number of coins: 2400) is met; second termination means (advantageous period termination functions S4505-S4507 of the main control unit 101) that terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is met (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter); and control means (display control device 81) that controls the display of an end screen notifying players that the advantageous state will end; wherein the control means controls the display of the end screen in the game turn following the game turn in which the first termination condition was met when the first termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends; and controls the display of the end screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met when the second termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends.

This gaming machine has a first and a second termination condition that terminates the advantageous state. If the first termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the next game turn following the one in which the first termination condition was met. If the second termination condition is met, ending the advantageous state, the system controls to display the termination screen in the game turn in which the second termination condition is met. In this way, by varying the game turn in which the termination screen is displayed depending on which termination condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as by executing auxiliary effects according to the termination condition that is met.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

The gaming machines O group through Q group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines O group through Q group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through N group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine R1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The targets to be determined in the lottery for the above roles are:
a first determination object (center left and right bell 1) that can be awarded a first number (8) of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with a first operation method (center left and right), and can be awarded a second number (1) of game media that is less than the first number when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the first operation method;
a second determination object (first special bell) that can establish a winning event in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by the first operation method, and a winning event in which the second number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated by an operation method different from the first operation method;
A gaming machine characterized in that a first group is formed by the first judgment object and another predetermined judgment object (left, middle, right bell 1), and a second group is formed by the second judgment object and another predetermined judgment object different from the first group (second special bell).

This gaming machine provides at least one determination target for determining winning combinations: a first determination target in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using a first operation method, and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which a second number of game media less than the first number is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the first operation method; and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which the first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method, and a second determination target in which a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the first operation method. This configuration makes it possible to associate multiple lottery results from the lottery means with a single event in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method.

Furthermore, the first judgment target forms a first group with other predetermined judgment targets, and the second judgment target forms a second group with other predetermined judgment targets different from the first group. This configuration makes it possible to perform control according to the group.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine R2. The gaming machine R1 described above includes at least the following targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a third target (right, left, center bell 1) that will result in a winning combination of the first number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method (right, left, center), and a potential winning combination of the second number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; and a fourth target (third special bell) that will result in a winning combination of the first number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a potential winning combination of the second number of game media being awarded if the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; wherein the first group includes at least the first target and the third target, and the second group includes at least the second target and the fourth target.

This gaming machine provides at least the following determination targets for use in the winning combination lottery: a third determination target where a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method; and a fourth determination target where a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method, and a winning combination in which a second number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the second operation method. This configuration makes it possible to associate multiple lottery results from the lottery means with a single event in which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Furthermore, the first group includes at least the first and third determination targets, and the second group includes at least the second and fourth determination targets. By configuring it in this way, even if someone were to guess which group the winning determination target belonged to, it would be possible to prevent the operation method for achieving a win that awards the first number of gaming media from being discovered.

Gaming machine R3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine R2, characterized in that the first operation method and the second operation method have different operating orders for the multiple stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the first and second operation methods differ in the order of operation of the multiple stop operation means. This configuration makes it possible to avoid a direct correspondence between which group the winning determination target belongs to and the order of operation required to achieve a winning result in the award of the first number of gaming media.

Gaming machine R4. A gaming machine in the above gaming machine R2 or R3, characterized in that the probability of winning the first judgment subject is equal to the probability of winning the third judgment subject.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning the first determination target is equal to the probability of winning the third determination target. Therefore, when performing control according to the first group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded being different when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method and when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Gaming machine R5. Any of the gaming machines R2 to R4 described above, characterized in that the probability of winning the second judgment target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth judgment target.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target. Therefore, when performing control according to the second group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded being different when multiple stop operation means are operated using the first operation method and when multiple stop operation means are operated using the second operation method.

Gaming machine R6. Any of the gaming machines R2 to R5 described above, characterized in that multiple determination targets with equal winning probabilities are grouped together into one group.

With this gaming machine, multiple determination targets with the same winning probability are grouped together, so when control is performed according to the group, it is possible to prevent the probability of achieving a prize that awards the first number of gaming media from differing depending on the operation method.

Gaming machine R7. Any of the gaming machines R1 to R6 described above, characterized in that multiple determination targets for which a win is achieved in which the first number of gaming media is awarded only when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operating method are grouped together into one group.

With this gaming machine, multiple determination targets that will result in a win that awards the first number of gaming media only when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specified operation method are grouped together. Therefore, when control is performed according to the group, it is possible to avoid the probability of achieving a win that awards the first number of gaming media varying depending on the operation method.

Gaming machine R8. A gaming machine in any of the gaming machines R1 to R7 described above, wherein the first group includes judgment targets (left, center, right bells 1) that will result in a win to award the first number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method (left, center, right), and that will result in a win to award the second number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the specific operation method; and the second group does not include judgment targets that will result in a win to award the first number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using the specific operation method, and that will result in a win to award the second number of gaming media when the multiple stop operation means are operated using an operation method different from the specific operation method.

According to this gaming machine, the first group includes determination targets that can result in a win in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method, and a win in which a second number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a method different from the specific operation method. The second group does not include determination targets that can result in a win in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a specific operation method, and a win in which a second number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated using a method different from the specific operation method. This configuration makes it possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a configuration in which the probability of winning a win in which a first number of game media is awarded differs between operating multiple stop operation means using a specific operation method and operating multiple stop operation means using a method other than the specific operation method.

Gaming machine R9. Any of the gaming machines R1 to R8 described above, further comprising: an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies the player of an operation method that can result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded; and a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether or not to notify the player of the operation method, wherein the notification determination means determines to notify the player of the operation method with different frequency when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group.

With this gaming machine, the frequency with which it decides to notify the player of the operation method that will result in a win that awards the first number of gaming media differs between when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group. This configuration makes it possible to control the decision on whether to notify the player of the operation method according to the group.

Gaming machine R10. The gaming machine R9 described above, further comprising: a main control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the notification determination means and controlling the progress of the game; and a sub-control means (display control device 81) performing subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means; wherein the main control means, when the notification determination means determines to notify the operation method when a player has won a determination object belonging to the first or second group, transmits information indicating which determination object has been won to the sub-control means; and, when the notification determination means determines not to notify the operation method when a player has won a determination object belonging to the first or second group, transmits information indicating the group to which the winning determination object belongs to the sub-control means, but does not transmit information indicating which determination object has been won to the sub-control means.

This gaming machine includes a main control means having at least a lottery means and a notification determination means, which controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control means which performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means. When the notification determination means determines to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the main control means transmits information indicating which determination target has been won to the sub-control means. When the notification determination means determines not to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the main control means transmits information indicating the group to which the winning determination target belongs to the sub-control means, but does not transmit information indicating which determination target has been won to the sub-control means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the sub-control means so that when the notification determination means determines not to notify an operation method when a player has won a determination target belonging to the first or second group, the sub-control means does not know which determination target has been won. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as obtaining the winning determination target from the sub-control means.

Gaming machine S1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
As the objects of determination to be determined in the lottery for the role, specific objects of determination (center left right bell 1, first special bell) are provided for which a winning result of awarding a first number (8) of game media is achieved when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence (center left left), and a predetermined object of determination (left center right bell 1) is provided for which a winning result of awarding the first number of game media is achieved when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence (left center right), and at least a plurality of the specific objects of determination are provided,
The determination targets for which a winning event in which the first number of game media is awarded is established according to the operation sequence of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target, and a second group including the specific determination target but not including the predetermined determination target;
an operation sequence notifying means (an instruction monitor, an auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation sequence that can achieve a winning result in which the first number of game media is awarded;
a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to notify the user of the operation sequence;
The operation sequence notification means is characterized in that, in a specific game state (notification mode A), the frequency of notifying the operation sequence differs between when a judgment object belonging to the first group is won and when a judgment object belonging to the second group is won.

This gaming machine provides two types of targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a specific target for which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence, and a predetermined target for which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the frequency with which a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded is achieved when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence from when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

Furthermore, the targets for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means are classified into a first group including specific targets and predetermined targets, and a second group including specific targets but excluding predetermined targets. In a specific game state, the frequency of notification of the operation sequence differs between when a target belonging to the first group is won and when a target belonging to the second group is won. This configuration makes it possible to control the decision on whether to notify the operation sequence in a specific game state based on the group. As a result, it is possible to realize a specific game state with a relatively simple configuration in which, when a target for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means is won, the operation sequence is sometimes not notified and the operation sequence is sometimes not notified.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In addition, in a configuration with, for example, three different operation sequences that can result in a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, a third judgment target (right, left, center bell 1) is provided that will result in a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a third operation sequence (right, left, center), and the results are classified into a first group that includes the specific judgment target, the predetermined judgment target, and the third judgment target, and a second group that includes the specific judgment target and the third judgment target but does not include the predetermined judgment target, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The same applies to configurations with four or more of the above-mentioned operation sequences.

Gaming machine S2. The gaming machine S1 described above, characterized in that the probability of winning one of the specific judgment targets is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined judgment target.

With this gaming machine, the probability of winning one of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning a predetermined determination target. This configuration makes it possible to increase the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence compared to when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence.

Gaming machine S3. In the gaming machine S1 or S2 described above, the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability if a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence without fail if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific game state, if a player wins on a determination target belonging to the first group, the system determines that the operation sequence will be announced with a predetermined probability. If a player wins on a determination target belonging to the second group, the system determines that the operation sequence will always be announced. This configuration prevents disparities in player profits due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, if the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence compared to when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, a difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media will occur between a player who knows this fact and a player who does not know this fact when the operation sequence is not announced. However, if the system determines that the operation sequence will always be announced when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the difference in the probability of a win that awards the first number of game media when the operation sequence is not announced can be reduced, thereby reducing the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine S4. The gaming machine S3 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the objects belonging to the first group are set equal.

With this gaming machine, the winning probability of the determination targets belonging to the first group is equal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid differences in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified in a specific gaming state.

Gaming machine S5. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S4 above is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently than in the specific gaming state, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently in the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the first group is won than in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence at equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

In this gaming machine, the notification determination means determines that if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation sequence will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation sequence will be notified equally frequently in both the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in player profits due to the amount of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs between operating multiple stop operation means in the first operation sequence and operating multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not notified, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence does not change between the specific game state and the second specific game state when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of winning the specific determination target and the probability of winning the predetermined determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine S6. The gaming machine S5 described above, further comprising transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main control unit 101) for determining whether to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means has decided not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether to transition to the second specific gaming state is determined based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first or second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play in anticipation of transitioning to the second specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine S7. In the gaming machine S6, the transition determination means determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards the first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of transitioning to the second specific gaming state will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S5, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media, thereby making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine S8. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S7 described above, further comprising a grant determination means for determining whether to grant a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, based on the fact that a player wins a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when a player wins a determination target belonging to the first or second group in a specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence, it determines whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of times a player can play in the specific gaming state. This configuration allows the player to play in the hope of being awarded a bonus related to the number of times a player can play in the specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine S9. In the gaming machine S8 described above, the award determination means determines whether to award a bonus related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards a first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played under a specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of awarding the bonus will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S8, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine S10. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S9 described above, further comprising: a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence less frequently than the specific gaming state; and specific transition means (a game section processing function of the main control unit 101) for transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state, wherein the specific transition means is configured such that when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without notifying the first operation sequence, the frequency of transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without the first operation sequence being notified, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while also providing a clear distinction between the increase and decrease of gaming media between the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine T1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
As the objects to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination, a first object to be determined (center left right bell 1, first special bell) is provided, which will result in a winning of a first number (8) of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence (center left left), and a second object to be determined (left center right bell 1) is provided, which will result in a winning of a first number of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence (left center right),
an operation sequence notifying means (an instruction monitor, an auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying an operation sequence that can achieve a winning result in which the first number of game media is awarded;
a notification determination means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to notify the user of the operation sequence;
The probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation sequence notification means is configured so that in a specific gaming state (notification mode A), the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first judgment target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second judgment target is won.

This gaming machine provides two targets for determination in the winning combination lottery: a first target for determining a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence, and a second target for determining a winning combination in which a first number of game media is awarded when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. The probability of winning the first target for determination is higher than the probability of winning the second target for determination. This configuration makes it possible to differentiate the frequency of winning the first number of game media when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence from when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

Furthermore, in a specific gaming state, the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second determination target is won. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players in a specific gaming state due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards the first number of gaming media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards the first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact when the operation sequence is not notified. However, in a specific gaming state, if the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation sequence is notified when the second determination target is won, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of winning the first determination target and the probability of winning the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency with which a win resulting in the award of the first number of gaming media is achieved.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine T2. A gaming machine in accordance with the gaming machine T1 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the first determination target and the second determination target and the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence are determined so that, when the operation sequence has not been notified under the specific gaming state, the probability of achieving a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is equal when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence and when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

According to this gaming machine, when the operation sequence is not notified in a specific gaming state, the winning probability of the first and second judgment targets and the frequency at which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence are set so that the probability of achieving a win in which a first number of gaming media is awarded is equal when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to avoid disparities in profits between players in a specific gaming state due to their level of knowledge about the gaming machine.

Gaming machine T3. The gaming machine T1 or T2 described above, further comprising a grant determination means for determining whether to grant a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played in the specific gaming state, based on the first determination target or the second determination target being won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means deciding not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays available in the specific gaming state is determined based on whether the first or second determination target is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. With this configuration, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, it is possible to have the player play in the hope of being awarded a bonus related to the number of plays available in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T4. In the gaming machine T3 described above, the award determination means determines whether to award a bonus related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards a first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether or not to award a bonus related to the number of plays that can be played under a specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of awarding the bonus will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T3, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards a first number of gaming media, thereby effectively alleviating the above concerns.

Gaming machine T5. Any of the gaming machines T1 to T4 described above, further comprising: a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence less frequently than the specific gaming state; and specific transition means (a gaming section processing function of the main control unit 101) for transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state, wherein the specific transition means is configured such that when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without notifying the first operation sequence, the frequency of transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, when multiple stop operation means are operated in the first operation sequence without the first operation sequence being notified, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when multiple stop operation means are operated in the second operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, while also providing a clear distinction between the increase and decrease of gaming media between the predetermined gaming state and the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Gaming machine T6. Any of the gaming machines T1 to T5 described above has a plurality of first determination targets, and the determination targets for which a win in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved depending on the operation sequence of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including the first determination target and the second determination target, and a second group including the first determination target but not the second determination target, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with different frequencies when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the first group and when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the second group in the specific gaming state.

With this gaming machine, by providing multiple first determination targets, it is relatively easy to achieve a configuration in which the probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target.

Furthermore, the determination targets for which a winning combination of a first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means are classified into a first group including the first and second determination targets, and a second group including the first determination target but excluding the second determination target. In a specific game state, the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence differs between when a winning combination of a determination target belonging to the first group is selected and when a winning combination of a determination target belonging to the second group is selected. This configuration enables group-specific control when determining whether to notify the operation sequence in a specific game state. As a result, a specific game state in which the operation sequence is sometimes notified and sometimes not notified when a winning combination of a first number of game media is selected depending on the operation sequence of the multiple stop operation means can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

In addition, in a configuration with, for example, three different operation sequences that can result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, a third determination target (right, left, center bell 1) is provided that will result in a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded when the multiple stop operation means are operated in a third operation sequence (right, left, center), and the winning combination is classified into a first group that includes the first determination target, the second determination target, and the third determination target, and a second group that includes the first determination target and the third determination target but does not include the second determination target, thereby achieving the above-mentioned advantageous effects. The same applies to configurations with four or more of the above-mentioned operation sequences.

Gaming machine T7. In the gaming machine T6 described above, the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence with a predetermined probability if a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence without fail if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, if a determination target belonging to the first group is selected, the operation sequence is determined to be announced with a predetermined probability, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is selected, the operation sequence is determined to be announced without fail. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in profits between players based on their level of knowledge of the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs when multiple stop operation means are operated in a first operation sequence and when multiple stop operation means are operated in a second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not announced, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who knows this fact and a player who does not know this fact. However, in a configuration that determines that the operation sequence will always be notified when a win is achieved on a determination target belonging to the second group, it is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first determination target and the winning probability of the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media.

Gaming machine T8. The gaming machine T7 described above, characterized in that the winning probabilities of the objects to be determined belonging to the first group are set equal.

With this gaming machine, the winning probability of the determination targets belonging to the first group is equal. This configuration makes it possible to avoid differences in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of gaming media depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified in a specific gaming state.

Gaming machine T9. Any of the gaming machines T6 to T8 above is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently than in the specific gaming state, and the notification determination means determines to notify the operation sequence more frequently in the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the first group is won than in the specific gaming state, and determines to notify the operation sequence at equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state if a determination target belonging to the second group is won.

In this gaming machine, the notification determination means determines that if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation sequence will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the notification determination means determines that the operation sequence will be notified equally frequently in both the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to prevent disparities in player profits due to the amount of knowledge about the gaming machine. In other words, in a configuration in which the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media differs between operating multiple stop operation means in the first operation sequence and operating multiple stop operation means in the second operation sequence, when the operation sequence is not notified, a difference will arise in the frequency of a winning combination that awards a first number of gaming media between a player who is aware of this fact and a player who is unaware of this fact. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of determining whether to notify the operation sequence does not change between the specific game state and the second specific game state when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, it is possible to reduce the difference in the winning probability between the first determination target and the second determination target when the operation sequence is not notified, and it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a prize that awards the first number of game media.

Gaming machine T10. The gaming machine T9 described above is characterized in that it includes transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main control unit 101) that determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence.

With this gaming machine, whether to transition to the second specific gaming state is determined based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first or second group is won in the specific gaming state and the notification determination means decides not to notify the operation sequence. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play in anticipation of transitioning to the second specific gaming state, even if the operation sequence is not notified in the specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T11. In the gaming machine T10 described above, the transition determination means determines whether to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning combination in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is achieved.

With this gaming machine, when a win that awards the first number of gaming media is achieved, a determination is made as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state. With this configuration, the probability of transitioning to the second specific gaming state will differ between a player who knows that the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media varies depending on the operation order, and a player who is unaware of this fact. This not only creates a disparity in profits between players, but can also lead to the latter player losing motivation to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T10, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of a win that awards the first number of gaming media, thereby making it possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

The gaming machines R group through T group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines R group through T group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group through Q group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

Gaming machine U1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant advantageous benefits (transition to notification mode, additional number of games);
An advantageous benefit granting means (announcement mode transition function S6307 of the main control device 101, an additional game number addition function S7010) that grants the advantageous benefit when the granting determination means determines that the advantageous benefit should be granted;
An effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestion effect (a showdown effect) that suggests whether or not the advantageous benefit will be awarded;
An execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion performance;
a period setting means for setting a plurality of game times as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be performed when it is determined that the suggestive performance is to be performed;
The execution decision means
A first execution determination means (a competition effect lottery function S6702 of the display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means has not determined that the advantageous benefit will be awarded under the first gaming state;
a second execution determination means (a competition effect lottery function S6901 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect in a situation in which the award determination means has not determined that the advantageous benefit will be awarded under the second gaming state;
The period setting means
a first period setting means (a competition game number setting function S6705 of the display control device 81) for setting the performance period when the first execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion performance;
a second period setting means (a competition game number setting function S6904 of the main control device 101) for setting the performance period when the second execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second execution decision means and the second period setting means are provided in a main control means (main control device 101) that manages the overall game, and the first execution decision means and the first period setting means are provided in a secondary control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means.

With this gaming machine, when a suggestive effect is executed to indicate whether or not a special bonus will be awarded, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible to maintain the anticipation of receiving a special bonus over multiple play times, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming state, when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous bonus will be awarded, the decision as to whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is made by the slave control means, and in the second gaming state, when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous bonus will be awarded, the decision as to whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is made by the master control means. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of processing programs that need to be pre-stored in the master control means, thereby preventing an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine U2. In the gaming machine U1 described above, the main control means manages the gaming state and is equipped with the award determination means and the advantageous bonus awarding means, and the award determination means determines whether to award an advantageous bonus in the second gaming state that will increase the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the award determination means determines, in the second gaming state, whether to award an advantageous benefit that will increase the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state. In this configuration, if the slave control means were to determine whether to execute a suggestive effect when the award determination means has not yet determined to award an advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, the processing configuration for determining whether to execute a suggestive effect could become complicated, or restrictions could be placed on the effects that can be executed. This is because, depending on the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state, restrictions could be placed on the number of plays in the set effect period, or the suggestive effect itself could not be executed. On the other hand, if the master control means were to determine whether to execute a suggestive effect when the award determination means has not yet determined to award an advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, the above concerns could be resolved effectively.

Gaming machine U3. A gaming machine similar to the gaming machine U2, but configured so that when the second period setting means sets the effect period, the second gaming state does not end until the effect period ends.

This gaming machine is configured so that the second gaming state does not end until the end of the presentation period set by the second period setting means. Therefore, for example, if it is decided to execute a suggestive presentation in the final play of the second gaming state, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state will increase by the number of plays set as the presentation period. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment even when a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that no additional bonus will be awarded.

Gaming machine U4. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (shortage game number derivation function S6905 of main control unit 101) for comparing the number of plays set by the second period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the second execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine U3; and a change means (shortage game number addition function S6906 of main control unit 101) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the second period setting means when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, when the second execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the second period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the second period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effects suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that if the remaining number of plays available in the second game state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means, the suggestive effects are not executed. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, despite the need for a processing configuration to check the remaining number of plays. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the system so that, after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, a different effect suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded is executed in one play. However, with this configuration, it becomes necessary to store the other effect in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state can be changed so that it becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine U5. In the gaming machine U3 or U4 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the second period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is not changed when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the second period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is approaching, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine U6. Any of the gaming machines U3 to U5 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the second period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the advantageous benefit will be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that a beneficial bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine U7. In the gaming machine U6 described above, if the award determination means determines that the advantageous benefit will be awarded during a game from the time the second period setting means sets the award period until the time the award period ends, the effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the advantageous benefit will be awarded.

According to this gaming machine, the second period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means has not determined that an advantageous perk will be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an advantageous perk will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an advantageous perk will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine U8. In any of the gaming machines U1 to U7, the second execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing structure related to suggestive effects while increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine U9. In any of the above gaming machines U1 to U8, the main control means manages the gaming state and is equipped with the award determination means and the advantageous bonus awarding means, and the award determination means determines, in the first gaming state, whether to award an advantageous bonus that will result in a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

In this gaming machine, the award determination means determines whether or not to award an advantageous benefit in the first gaming state, which will result in a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In this configuration, if the award determination means does not determine that an advantageous benefit will be awarded in the first gaming state, the first gaming state will continue. Therefore, even if the slave control means is configured to determine whether or not to execute a suggestive effect, there is no possibility that the processing configuration for determining whether or not to execute a suggestive effect will become complicated, or that restrictions will be placed on the effects that can be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of processing programs that need to be stored in advance in the master control means, and suppresses increases in storage capacity.

Gaming machine U10. In the gaming machine U9 described above, the main control means includes a waiting period setting means (transition game number change function S6207 of the main control device 101) that sets a number of game rounds as a waiting period when the award determination means determines that the advantageous award will be awarded in the first gaming state, the advantageous award awarding means transitions the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after the waiting period has elapsed when the award determination means determines that the advantageous award will be awarded in the first gaming state, and the effect execution means, when the waiting period setting means sets the waiting period, executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the advantageous award will be awarded during the waiting period.

In this gaming machine, if the award determination means determines that a favorable bonus will be awarded in the first gaming state, a waiting period of multiple game plays is set. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed, the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. At this time, the effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that a favorable bonus will be awarded during the waiting period. This configuration makes it possible to transition the gaming state after executing a suggestion effect that suggests a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine U11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine U10 described above, the master control means comprises an information transmission means (a battle command transmission function S6210 of the master control device 101) for transmitting information relating to the setting result of the waiting period to the slave control means, and the slave control means comprises a presentation period change means (a function S6404 of the display control device 81 for changing the number of games to be announced) for changing the length of the presentation period so that the presentation period ends when the information is received from the information transmission means in a game round from when the first period setting means sets the presentation period to when the presentation period ends, so that the presentation period ends when the waiting period ends.

With this gaming machine, the slave control means decides to execute a suggestive effect and sets a presentation period when it has not yet determined that the first gaming state should be transitioned to the second gaming state; if the master control means determines that the first gaming state should be transitioned to the second gaming state during the presentation period, the slave control means changes the length of the presentation period so that the play time at which the standby period ends coincides with the play time at which the presentation period ends. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that a favorable bonus will be awarded during the presentation period, even when the slave control means has decided to execute a suggestive effect.

The gaming machine U12. In any of the gaming machines U2 to U11, the execution decision means comprises a third execution decision means (transition lottery function S6204 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether to execute the suggestive effect in a situation in which the award determination means has decided to award the advantageous benefit in the first gaming state, and a fourth execution decision means (confrontation effect lottery function S7002 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether to execute the suggestive effect in a situation in which the award determination means has decided to award the advantageous benefit in the second gaming state, and the third execution decision means and the fourth execution decision means are provided in the main control means.

With this gaming machine, when it is decided to award a favorable bonus, the main control means decides whether to execute a suggestive effect, regardless of whether the game is in the first or second game state. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestive effect at the appropriate time when it is decided to award a favorable bonus.

Gaming machine V1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means (an additional lottery function S6803 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of times that can be played under the second gaming state;
and an increased bonus awarding means (an additional game number adding function S7010 of the main control device 101) that awards the increased bonus when the awarding determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded.
A gaming machine characterized in that even when the award determination means determines that the increased benefit will not be awarded, the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state may increase.

In this gaming machine, in the second gaming state, a determination may be made as to whether or not to grant an increased bonus, which will increase the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state. Even if a determination is made not to grant an increased bonus, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state may increase. This configuration makes it possible to mitigate player disappointment when a determination is made not to grant an increased bonus.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine V2. The gaming machine V1 described above is equipped with an effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a suggestive effect (challenge effect) that suggests whether or not the increased bonus will be awarded, an execution decision means (challenge effect lottery functions S6901, S7002 of the main control unit 101) that decides whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, and a period setting means (challenge game number setting functions S6904, S7005 of the main control unit 101) that, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect, sets a number of game rounds as the effect period in which the suggestive effect can be executed, and is configured so that the second game state does not end until the effect period ends.

This gaming machine may execute a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. When this suggestive effect is executed, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play while anticipating the award of an increased bonus over multiple play times. Furthermore, since the second gaming state does not end until the end of the effect period, if, for example, it is decided to execute a suggestive effect in the last play time of the second gaming state, the number of play times available in the second gaming state will increase by the number of play times set as the effect period. As a result, it is possible to mitigate the player's disappointment even if a suggestive effect that suggests no increased bonus will be awarded is executed.

Gaming machine V3. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (main control unit 101's missing number of games derivation function S6905, S7006) for comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine V2; and a change means (main control unit 101's missing number of games addition function S6906, S7007) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means when the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when the execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effects suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded. For example, it is possible to configure the system so that if the remaining number of plays available in the second game state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means, the suggestive effects are not executed. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, despite the need for a processing configuration to check the remaining number of plays. To alleviate this concern, it is possible to configure the system so that, after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays, a different effect suggesting whether or not an increased bonus will be awarded is executed in one play. However, with this configuration, it becomes necessary to store the other effect in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the remaining number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state can be changed so that it becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means, it is possible to effectively alleviate the above concerns.

Gaming machine V4. In the gaming machine V3 described above, when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the comparison means obtains the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state as the number of games that remain before the increased bonus award means awarded the increased bonus.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means is not taken into consideration. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means being partially consumed during the presentation period.

Gaming machine V5. In the gaming machine V3 or V4 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state remains unchanged when the number of plays set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is near, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine V6. In any of the above gaming machines V2 to V5, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a suggestive effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing structure related to suggestive effects while increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine V7. Any of the above gaming machines V2 to V6, characterized in that it does not include a means for changing the length of the effect period between the time when the period setting means sets the effect period and the time when the effect period ends.

With this gaming machine, the length of the presentation period cannot be changed midway. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the second gaming state does not end as a result of the presentation period being extended.

Gaming machine V8. Any of the gaming machines V2 to V7 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an additional bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine V9. In the gaming machine V7 or V8, the period setting means sets the presentation period under circumstances in which the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, the presentation execution means executes a suggestion presentation that suggests that the increased bonus will be awarded.

In this gaming machine, the period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an increased bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine V10. In any of the above gaming machines V2 to V9, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the determination result of the award determination means.

With this gaming machine, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the result of the decision as to whether or not to award an increased bonus. This configuration makes it possible to create an opportunity for the number of available plays to increase in the second gaming state even when a decision is made not to award an increased bonus, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment when a decision is made not to award an increased bonus.

Gaming machine W1. A plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures (designs),
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit insertion switches 56 to 58) that are operated to start the circulating display of the pictures;
A lottery means for drawing lots for winning combinations (lottery processing function of the main control device 101);
A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circulating display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means (such as a medal payout process S213 of the main control device 101) that awards a bonus to a player when a winning combination that is won in the lottery for the winning role and a winning pattern that corresponds to the winning role form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small winning symbols) and stop at an effective position (effective line),
The game state has a first game state (chance mode) and a second game state (notification mode) in which the operation frequency of an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific win (bell win) is higher than that of the first game state,
A grant determination means (an additional lottery function S6803 of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of times that can be played under the second gaming state;
An increased bonus awarding means (an additional game number adding function S7010 of the main control device 101) that awards the increased bonus when the awarding determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded;
An effect execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a suggestion effect (a showdown effect) that suggests whether or not the additional benefit will be given;
An execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (a showdown effect lottery function S6901, S7002 of the main control device 101);
When it is determined that the suggestive effect is to be executed, a period setting means (a game number setting function S6904, S7005 of the main control device 101) is provided for setting a plurality of game times as an effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not provided with a means for changing the length of the presentation period set by the period setting means.

This gaming machine may execute a suggestive effect that indicates whether or not an additional bonus will be awarded. When this suggestive effect is executed, multiple play times are set as the effect period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. This configuration makes it possible for players to play while anticipating the award of an additional bonus over multiple play times.

In addition, once a performance period is set, the length of that performance period will not be changed midway. This configuration simplifies the processing structure while preventing the performance period from becoming unnecessarily long.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase interest in gaming.

Gaming machine W2. In the gaming machine W1 described above, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, whether or not to execute a suggestive effect is determined regardless of the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration related to the suggestive effect while enhancing gaming interest. For example, it is possible to configure the system not to execute a suggestive effect if the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state falls below the maximum number of plays that can be set by the period setting means. However, this configuration requires processing to check the remaining number of plays, but there is a concern that gameplay may become monotonous after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays. To address this concern, it is possible to configure the system to execute a different effect that suggests whether or not an additional bonus will be awarded in one play after the remaining number of plays falls below the maximum number of plays. However, this configuration not only creates the new problem of increased storage capacity due to the need to store the other effect in advance, but also creates the problem of the effects that can be executed being restricted by the remaining number of plays. On the other hand, if the system is configured to determine whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the number of remaining plays that can be played in the second gaming state, it is possible to effectively resolve each of the above concerns.

Gaming machine W3. In the gaming machine W2, the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the suggestion effect regardless of the determination result of the award determination means.

With this gaming machine, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a suggestion effect regardless of the result of the judgment as to whether or not to grant an increased bonus. This configuration makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect even when a judgment is made not to grant an increased bonus in a situation where there are few plays remaining, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching, and prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous when the end of the second gaming state is approaching.

Gaming machine W4. Any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 described above, characterized in that, in a game from when the period setting means sets the presentation period until the presentation period ends, if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the length of the presentation period does not change.

With this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an additional bonus will be awarded midway through the presentation period, the length of the presentation period does not change. This configuration simplifies the processing configuration while preventing the presentation period from becoming unnecessarily long.

Gaming machine W5. In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the period setting means sets the presentation period under circumstances in which the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played up until the end of the presentation period, the presentation execution means executes a suggestion presentation that suggests that the increased bonus will be awarded.

In this gaming machine, the period setting means sets a presentation period when the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will not be awarded, and if the award determination means determines that an increased bonus will be awarded during the number of games played until the end of the presentation period, a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that an increased bonus will be awarded. This configuration makes it possible to execute suggestive presentations in accordance with the determination results of the award determination means, even when the length of the presentation period is not changed.

Gaming machine W6. Any of the gaming machines W1 to W5 described above, characterized in that the second gaming state does not end until the performance period ends.

This gaming machine is configured so that the second gaming state does not end until the presentation period ends. Therefore, if it is decided to execute a suggestive presentation during the final play of the second gaming state, for example, the number of plays available in the second gaming state will increase by the number of plays set as the presentation period. As a result, even if a suggestive presentation is executed that suggests that no additional bonus will be awarded, it is possible to mitigate the player's disappointment.

Gaming machine W7. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a comparison means (main control unit 101's missing number of games derivation function S6905, S7006) for comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestive effect in the gaming machine W6; and a change means (main control unit 101's missing number of games addition function S6906, S7007) for changing the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means when the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, when the execution decision means decides to execute a suggestion effect, the number of plays set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. If the number of plays set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state becomes the number of plays set by the period setting means. This configuration makes it possible to configure the second gaming state not to end until the effect period has ended.

Gaming machine W8. In the gaming machine W7 described above, when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion effect in a situation where the award determination means determines that the increased bonus should be awarded, the comparison means obtains the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state as the number of games that can be played before the increased bonus award means awarded the increased bonus.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of plays set by the period setting means with the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means is not taken into consideration. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the increased bonus awarded by the increased bonus awarding means being partially consumed during the presentation period.

Gaming machine W9. In the gaming machine W7 or W8 described above, the change means does not change the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state, or when the number of games set by the period setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state.

With this gaming machine, the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state remains unchanged when the number of plays set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state, or when the number of plays set by the period setting means is less than the remaining number of plays available in the second gaming state. This configuration makes it possible to limit opportunities for the remaining number of plays to increase as a result of the execution of suggestive effects to situations where the remaining number of plays is low, i.e., when the end of the second gaming state is approaching. As a result, it is possible to provide new gameplay when the end of the second gaming state is near, thereby increasing gaming interest.

Gaming machine W10. Any of the above gaming machines W1 to W9, characterized in that the number of playable games in the second gaming state may increase even if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded.

With this gaming machine, even if a determination is made not to award an increased bonus, the number of plays that can be played in the second gaming state may increase. This configuration makes it possible to mitigate the player's disappointment when a determination is made not to award an increased bonus.

The gaming machines U group to W group may be combined as appropriate, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined. The gaming machines U group to W group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machines A group to T group, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved even when combined.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body constituting circulation display means, 41... start lever as start operation means or initiation operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 56... first credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57... second credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58... third credit insertion switch as start operation means or input operation means, 63... upper lamp constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 81... display control device constituting sub-control board or specific performance execution means, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of cyclic display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures;
A start operation means that is operated to start the cyclical display of the images;
A lottery means for drawing lots for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means that are operated to individually stop the cyclical display of the pictures;
In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player when a winning combination won in the lottery and a winning pattern corresponding to the winning combination form a predetermined combination at an effective position and stop,
The game state includes a first game state and a second game state in which an instruction function for informing an operation method for achieving a specific win is activated more frequently than in the first game state,
A grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state;
an increased benefit granting means for granting the increased benefit when the granting determination means determines that the increased benefit should be granted;
An effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the increased benefit is given;
An execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion performance;
a period setting means for setting a plurality of game times as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be performed when it is determined that the suggestive performance is to be performed ;
a comparison means for comparing the number of games set by the period setting means with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state when the execution decision means decides to execute the suggestion effect;
a change means for changing the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state so that the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state becomes the number of games that can be played set by the period setting means when the number of games set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played in the second gaming state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state is configured not to end until the presentation period ends, so that even if the award determination means determines that the increased bonus will not be awarded, the number of games that can be played in the second gaming state may increase, while the length of the presentation period set by the period setting means does not change .